]> Git Repo - binutils.git/blame - ld/ld.texinfo
sparc-aout and sparc-coff breakage
[binutils.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
4b95cf5c 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
1db37fe6 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
1db37fe6 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a
DJ
708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
710
252b5132
RH
711@ifset UsesEnvVars
712The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 713@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
714some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
715@end ifset
716
717The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
718@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
719at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
720
721@cindex emulation
722@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 723@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
724Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
725emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
726
727If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
728@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
729
730Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
731configured.
732
733@cindex link map
734@kindex -M
735@kindex --print-map
736@item -M
737@itemx --print-map
738Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
739information about the link, including the following:
740
741@itemize @bullet
742@item
3b83e13a 743Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
744@item
745How common symbols are allocated.
746@item
747All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
748which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
749@item
750The values assigned to symbols.
751
752Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
753involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
754have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
755linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
756of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
757the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
758linker script containing:
759
760@smallexample
761 foo = 1
762 foo = foo * 4
763 foo = foo + 8
764@end smallexample
765
766will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
767option is used:
768
769@smallexample
770 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
771 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
773@end smallexample
774
775See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
776scripts.
252b5132
RH
777@end itemize
778
779@kindex -n
780@cindex read-only text
781@cindex NMAGIC
782@kindex --nmagic
783@item -n
784@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
785Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
786libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
787mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
788
789@kindex -N
790@kindex --omagic
791@cindex read/write from cmd line
792@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 793@item -N
252b5132
RH
794@itemx --omagic
795Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
796not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
797libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
798mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
799is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
800specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
801
802@kindex --no-omagic
803@cindex OMAGIC
804@item --no-omagic
805This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
806sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
807be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
808shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
809
810@kindex -o @var{output}
811@kindex --output=@var{output}
812@cindex naming the output file
813@item -o @var{output}
814@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 815Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
816option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
817script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
818
819@kindex -O @var{level}
820@cindex generating optimized output
821@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 822If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 823the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
824should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
825option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
826the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
827no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
828of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 829
26278bb8
UD
830@kindex --push-state
831@cindex push state governing input file handling
832@item --push-state
833The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
834flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
835restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
836
837The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
838@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
839@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
840@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
841@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
842@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
843
844One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
845used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
846listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
847something as follows:
848
849@smallexample
850-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
851@end smallexample
852
853@kindex --pop-state
854@cindex pop state governing input file handling
855Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
856flags governing input file handling.
857
a712da20
NC
858@kindex -q
859@kindex --emit-relocs
860@cindex retain relocations in final executable
861@item -q
862@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 863Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
864Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
865order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
866in larger executables.
867
dbab7a7b
NC
868This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
869
4f471f39
RS
870@kindex --force-dynamic
871@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
872@item --force-dynamic
873Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
874to VxWorks targets.
875
252b5132
RH
876@cindex partial link
877@cindex relocatable output
878@kindex -r
1049f94e 879@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 880@item -r
1049f94e 881@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 882Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 883turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
884linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
885magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
886@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 887@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
888If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
889linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
890constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
891
62bf86b4
HPN
892When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
893partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
894relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
895example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
896with input files in other formats at all.
897
252b5132
RH
898This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
899
900@kindex -R @var{file}
901@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
902@cindex symbol-only input
903@item -R @var{filename}
904@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
905Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
906relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
907to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
908programs. You may use this option more than once.
909
ff5dcc92 910For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 911followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 912the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
913
914@kindex -s
915@kindex --strip-all
916@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 917@item -s
252b5132
RH
918@itemx --strip-all
919Omit all symbol information from the output file.
920
921@kindex -S
922@kindex --strip-debug
923@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 924@item -S
252b5132
RH
925@itemx --strip-debug
926Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
927
928@kindex -t
929@kindex --trace
930@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 931@item -t
252b5132 932@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 933Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
934
935@kindex -T @var{script}
936@kindex --script=@var{script}
937@cindex script files
938@item -T @var{scriptfile}
939@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
940Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 941@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 942@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
943output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
944the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
945specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
946options accumulate.
252b5132 947
14be8564
L
948@kindex -dT @var{script}
949@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
950@cindex script files
951@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
952@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
953Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
954
955This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
956processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
957command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
958@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
959behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
960command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
961the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
962@samp{gcc}).
963
252b5132
RH
964@kindex -u @var{symbol}
965@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
966@cindex undefined symbol
967@item -u @var{symbol}
968@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
969Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
970symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
971modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
972different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
973option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
974
975@kindex -Ur
976@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 977@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
978For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
979@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 980turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
981@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
982It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
983with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
984be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
985@samp{-r} for the others.
986
577a0623
AM
987@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
988@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
989Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
990@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
991missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
992specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
993multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
994input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
995in a linker script.
a854a4a7 996
252b5132
RH
997@kindex -v
998@kindex -V
999@kindex --version
1000@cindex version
1001@item -v
1002@itemx --version
1003@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1004Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1005lists the supported emulations.
1006
1007@kindex -x
1008@kindex --discard-all
1009@cindex deleting local symbols
1010@item -x
1011@itemx --discard-all
1012Delete all local symbols.
1013
1014@kindex -X
1015@kindex --discard-locals
1016@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1017@item -X
252b5132 1018@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1019Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1020system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1021or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1022
1023@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1024@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1025@cindex symbol tracing
1026@item -y @var{symbol}
1027@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1028Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1029option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1030to prepend an underscore.
1031
1032This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1033don't know where the reference is coming from.
1034
1035@kindex -Y @var{path}
1036@item -Y @var{path}
1037Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1038for Solaris compatibility.
1039
1040@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1041@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1042The recognized keywords are:
1043@table @samp
1044
1045@item combreloc
1046Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1047lookup caching possible.
1048
1049@item defs
560e09e9 1050Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1051shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1052
6aa29e7b
JJ
1053@item execstack
1054Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1055
b039ef04
L
1056@item global
1057This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1058the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1059of subsequently loaded libraries.
1060
cd6d6c15
NC
1061@item initfirst
1062This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1063It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1064before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1065the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1066the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1067objects.
1068
1069@item interpose
1070Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1071but the primary executable.
1072
5fa222e4
AM
1073@item lazy
1074When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1075dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1076the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1077Lazy binding is the default.
1078
cd6d6c15
NC
1079@item loadfltr
1080Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1081runtime.
1082
1083@item muldefs
1084Allows multiple definitions.
1085
1086@item nocombreloc
1087Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1088
1089@item nocopyreloc
1090Disables production of copy relocs.
1091
1092@item nodefaultlib
1093Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1094ignore any default library search paths.
1095
1096@item nodelete
1097Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1098
1099@item nodlopen
1100Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1101
1102@item nodump
1103Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1104
6aa29e7b
JJ
1105@item noexecstack
1106Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1107
1108@item norelro
1109Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1110
cd6d6c15
NC
1111@item now
1112When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1113dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1114when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1115deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1116first called.
1117
1118@item origin
1119Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1120
6aa29e7b
JJ
1121@item relro
1122Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1123
24718e3b
L
1124@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1125Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1126
1127@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1128Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1129
04c3a755
NS
1130@item stack-size=@var{value}
1131Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1132Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1133@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1134
cd6d6c15
NC
1135@end table
1136
ece2d90e 1137Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1138
1139@kindex -(
1140@cindex groups of archives
1141@item -( @var{archives} -)
1142@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1143The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1144either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1145
1146The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1147references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1148the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1149archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1150object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1151would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1152they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1153resolved.
1154
1155Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1156it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1157more archives.
1158
69da35b5
NC
1159@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1160@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1161@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1162@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1163Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1164recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1165and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1166the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1167behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1168so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1169restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1170
4a43e768
AM
1171@kindex --as-needed
1172@kindex --no-as-needed
1173@item --as-needed
1174@itemx --no-as-needed
1175This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1176on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1177the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1178on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1179needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1180emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1181non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1182the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1183non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1184Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1185the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1186needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1187from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1188
e56f61be
L
1189@kindex --add-needed
1190@kindex --no-add-needed
1191@item --add-needed
1192@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1193These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1194their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1195options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1196and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1197
252b5132
RH
1198@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1199@item -assert @var{keyword}
1200This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1201
1202@kindex -Bdynamic
1203@kindex -dy
1204@kindex -call_shared
1205@item -Bdynamic
1206@itemx -dy
1207@itemx -call_shared
1208Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1209for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1210default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1211for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1212multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1213@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1214
a1ab1d2a
UD
1215@kindex -Bgroup
1216@item -Bgroup
1217Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1218section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1219object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1220@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1221only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1222
252b5132
RH
1223@kindex -Bstatic
1224@kindex -dn
1225@kindex -non_shared
1226@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1227@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1228@itemx -dn
1229@itemx -non_shared
1230@itemx -static
1231Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1232platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1233variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1234may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1235library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1236option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1237option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1238shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1239references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1240libraries.
252b5132
RH
1241
1242@kindex -Bsymbolic
1243@item -Bsymbolic
1244When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1245definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1246for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1247within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1248platforms which support shared libraries.
1249
40b36307
L
1250@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1251@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1252When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1253symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1254This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1255libraries.
1256
55255dae
L
1257@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1258@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1259Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1260typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1261global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1262within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1263to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1264in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1265which support shared libraries.
1266
1267The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1268scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1269
40b36307
L
1270@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1271@item --dynamic-list-data
1272Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1273
1274@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1275@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1276Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1277is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1278
0b8a70d9
L
1279@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1280@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1281Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1282
252b5132
RH
1283@kindex --check-sections
1284@kindex --no-check-sections
1285@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1286@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1287Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1288been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1289perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1290suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1291allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1292restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1293Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1294force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1295option.
252b5132 1296
ddbb8a31
NC
1297@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1298@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1299@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1300@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1301This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1302by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1303command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1304output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1305input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1306specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1307follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1308behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1309
1310This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1311libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1312mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1313their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1314required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1315the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1316dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1317symbols.
1318
252b5132
RH
1319@cindex cross reference table
1320@kindex --cref
1321@item --cref
1322Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1323generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1324Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1325
1326The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1327easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1328sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1329symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1330definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1331where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1332symbol are listed.
252b5132 1333
4818e05f
AM
1334@cindex common allocation
1335@kindex --no-define-common
1336@item --no-define-common
1337This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1338The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1339@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1340
1341The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1342the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1343of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1344forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1345Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1346from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1347This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1348and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1349duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1350paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1351
252b5132 1352@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1353@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1354@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1355Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1356address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1357times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1358limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1359context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1360symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1361constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1362using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1363Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1364space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1365@var{expression}.
1366
1367@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1368@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1369@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1370@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1371@itemx --no-demangle
1372These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1373and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1374present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1375underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1376mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1377different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1378to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1379demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1380is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1381
1382@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1383@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1384@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1385@item -I@var{file}
1386@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1387Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1388generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1389linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1390doing.
1391
7ce691ae 1392@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1393@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1394@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1395@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1396Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1397with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1398
252b5132
RH
1399@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1400@item --force-exe-suffix
1401Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1402
1403If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1404@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1405the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1406option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1407Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1408it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1409
1410@kindex --gc-sections
1411@kindex --no-gc-sections
1412@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1413@item --gc-sections
1414@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1415Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1416targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1417performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1418@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1419
d5465ba2
AM
1420@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1421examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1422symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1423command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1424referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1425libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1426referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1427the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1428relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1429
ac69cbc6 1430This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1431@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1432specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1433a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1434
c17d87de
NC
1435@kindex --print-gc-sections
1436@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1437@cindex garbage collection
1438@item --print-gc-sections
1439@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1440List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1441printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1442collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1443default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1444be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1445line.
1446
30824704
RM
1447@kindex --print-output-format
1448@cindex output format
1449@item --print-output-format
1450Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1451other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1452in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1453
252b5132
RH
1454@cindex help
1455@cindex usage
1456@kindex --help
1457@item --help
1458Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1459
ea20a7da
CC
1460@kindex --target-help
1461@item --target-help
1462Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1463
2509a395
SL
1464@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1465@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1466Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1467@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1468
1469@cindex memory usage
1470@kindex --no-keep-memory
1471@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1472@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1473symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1474instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1475necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1476while linking a large executable.
1477
1478@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1479@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1480@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1481@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1482Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1483is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1484The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1485behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1486libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1487
aa713662
L
1488@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1489@kindex -z muldefs
1490@item --allow-multiple-definition
1491@itemx -z muldefs
1492Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1493report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1494first definition will be used.
1495
b79e8c78 1496@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1497@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1498@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1499@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1500Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1501This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1502determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1503shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1504how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1505
903249d7
NC
1506The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1507referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1508an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1509a shared library.
1510
1511The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1512libraries specified at link time are that:
1513
1514@itemize @bullet
1515@item
1516A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1517that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1518resolvable at load time.
1519@item
1520There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1521symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1522
1523The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1524select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1525architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1526appropriate memset function.
1527@end itemize
b79e8c78 1528
31941635
L
1529@kindex --no-undefined-version
1530@item --no-undefined-version
1531Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1532it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1533will be issued instead.
1534
3e3b46e5
PB
1535@kindex --default-symver
1536@item --default-symver
1537Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1538exported symbols.
1539
1540@kindex --default-imported-symver
1541@item --default-imported-symver
1542Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1543imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1544
252b5132
RH
1545@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1546@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1547Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1548files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1549been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1550This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1551errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1552have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1553inappropriate.
1554
fe7929ce
AM
1555@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1556@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1557Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1558library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1559
252b5132
RH
1560@kindex --no-whole-archive
1561@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1562Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1563archive files.
1564
1565@cindex output file after errors
1566@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1567@item --noinhibit-exec
1568Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1569Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1570errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1571when it issues any error whatsoever.
1572
0a9c1c8e
CD
1573@kindex -nostdlib
1574@item -nostdlib
1575Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1576command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1577(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1578
252b5132 1579@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1580@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1581@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1582@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1583file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1584@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1585object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1586object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1587should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1588usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1589name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1590list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1591command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1592this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1593@end ifclear
1594
36af4a4e
JJ
1595@kindex -pie
1596@kindex --pic-executable
1597@item -pie
1598@itemx --pic-executable
1599@cindex position independent executables
1600Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1601ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1602libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1603address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1604normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1605defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1606
252b5132
RH
1607@kindex -qmagic
1608@item -qmagic
1609This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1610
1611@kindex -Qy
1612@item -Qy
1613This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1614
1615@kindex --relax
1616@cindex synthesizing linker
1617@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1618@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1619@item --relax
28d5f677 1620@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1621An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1622@ifset GENERIC
1623This option is only supported on a few targets.
1624@end ifset
1625@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1626@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1627@end ifset
1628@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1629@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1630@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1631@ifset XTENSA
1632@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1633@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1634@ifset M68HC11
1635@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1636@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1637@ifset NIOSII
1638@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1639@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1640@ifset POWERPC
1641@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1642@end ifset
252b5132 1643
28d5f677
NC
1644On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1645global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1646addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1647synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1648instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1649
1650On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1651debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1652@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1653This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1654family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1655@end ifset
1656
1657@ifset GENERIC
1658On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1659but ignored.
1660@end ifset
1661
28d5f677
NC
1662On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1663@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1664
252b5132
RH
1665@cindex retaining specified symbols
1666@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1667@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1668@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1669@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1670Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1671discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1672symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1673@ifset GENERIC
1674(such as VxWorks)
1675@end ifset
1676where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1677run-time memory.
1678
1679@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1680or symbols needed for relocations.
1681
1682You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1683line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1684
1685@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1686@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1687@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1688@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1689Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1690linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1691arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1692them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1693also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1694objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1695@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1696ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1697@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1698
ff5dcc92 1699The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1700SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1701@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1702runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1703options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1704gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1705file systems.
252b5132 1706
ff5dcc92 1707For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1708followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1709the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1710@end ifset
1711
1712@ifset GENERIC
1713@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1714@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1715@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1716When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1717happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1718of the input files.
1719
1720When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1721non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1722shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1723explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1724specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1725@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1726either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1727appearing multiple times.
1728
28c309a2
NC
1729This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1730that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1731is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1732runtime linker would do.
1733
252b5132 1734The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1735libraries:
252b5132
RH
1736@enumerate
1737@item
ff5dcc92 1738Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1739@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1740Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1741between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1742specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1743used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1744at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1745by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1746the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1747@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1748On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1749@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1750environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1751@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1752On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1753directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1754@item
a1b8d843 1755For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1756variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1757@item
ec4eb78a
L
1758For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1759@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1760libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1761@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1762@item
252b5132
RH
1763The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1764@item
1765For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1766exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1767@end enumerate
1768
1769If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1770warning and continue with the link.
1771@end ifset
1772
1773@kindex -shared
1774@kindex -Bshareable
1775@item -shared
1776@itemx -Bshareable
1777@cindex shared libraries
1778Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1779and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1780shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1781undefined symbols in the link.
1782
252b5132 1783@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1784@item --sort-common
1785@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1786@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1787This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1788ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1789sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1790eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1791between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1792specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1793
2509a395
SL
1794@kindex --sort-section=name
1795@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1796This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1797patterns in the linker script.
1798
2509a395
SL
1799@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1800@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1801This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1802patterns in the linker script.
1803
252b5132 1804@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1805@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1806Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1807each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1808size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1809
1810@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1811@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1812Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1813output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1814This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1815certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1816cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1817that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1818support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1819input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1820more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1821many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1822
1823@kindex --stats
1824@item --stats
1825Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1826as execution time and memory usage.
1827
2509a395 1828@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1829@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1830Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1831configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1832that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1833
252b5132
RH
1834@kindex --traditional-format
1835@cindex traditional format
1836@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1837For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1838the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1839use the traditional format instead.
1840
1841@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1842For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1843symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1844full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1845@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1846trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1847combine duplicate entries.
1848
2509a395
SL
1849@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1850@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1851Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1852address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1853times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1854line.
1855@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1856for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1857@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1858should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1859sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1860
2509a395
SL
1861@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1862@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1863@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1864@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1865@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1866@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1867@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1868Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1869@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1870
2509a395
SL
1871@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1872@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 1873@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
1874When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1875byte of the text segment.
258795f5 1876
9d5777a3
RM
1877@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1878@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1879@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1880When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1881the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1882text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1883
0d705e9f
AM
1884@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1885@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1886@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1887When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1888model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1889
560e09e9
NC
1890@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1891@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1892Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1893values for @samp{method}:
1894
1895@table @samp
1896@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1897Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1898
1899@item report-all
da8bce14 1900Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1901
1902@item ignore-in-object-files
1903Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1904ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1905
1906@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1907Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1908ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1909when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1910libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1911command line.
1912@end table
1913
1914The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1915by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1916
1917Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1918unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1919can change this to a warning.
1920
1715a13c
L
1921@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1922@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1923@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1924@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1925Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1926supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1927the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1928argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1929
1930@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1931@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1932@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1933Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1934used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1935about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1936is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1937see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1938use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1939symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1940@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1941
7ce691ae 1942@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1943@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1944@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1945@item --warn-common
1946Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 1947a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
1948but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1949you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 1950Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1951warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1952
1953There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1954
1955@table @samp
1956@item int i = 1;
1957A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1958file.
1959
1960@item extern int i;
1961An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1962There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1963variable somewhere.
1964
1965@item int i;
1966A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1967variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1968The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1969single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1970size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1971a definition of the same variable.
1972@end table
1973
1974The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1975Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1976just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1977encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1978a common symbol.
1979
1980@enumerate
1981@item
1982Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1983definition for the symbol.
1984@smallexample
1985@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1986 overridden by definition
1987@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1988@end smallexample
1989
1990@item
1991Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1992the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1993except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1994@smallexample
1995@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1996 overriding common
1997@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1998@end smallexample
1999
2000@item
2001Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2002@smallexample
2003@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2004 of `@var{symbol}'
2005@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2006@end smallexample
2007
2008@item
2009Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2010@smallexample
2011@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2012 overridden by larger common
2013@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2014@end smallexample
2015
2016@item
2017Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2018the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2019encountered in a different order.
2020@smallexample
2021@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2022 overriding smaller common
2023@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2024@end smallexample
2025@end enumerate
2026
2027@kindex --warn-constructors
2028@item --warn-constructors
2029Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2030object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2031detect the use of global constructors.
2032
2033@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2034@item --warn-multiple-gp
2035Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2036This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2037Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2038section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2039of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2040base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2041base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2042bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2043large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2044values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2045option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2046
2047@kindex --warn-once
2048@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2049@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2050@item --warn-once
2051Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2052which refers to it.
2053
2054@kindex --warn-section-align
2055@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2056@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2057@item --warn-section-align
2058Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2059alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2060The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2061is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2062the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2063
8fdd7217
NC
2064@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2065@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2066Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2067
a0c402a5
L
2068@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2069@item --warn-alternate-em
2070Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2071
560e09e9
NC
2072@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2073@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2074If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2075@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2076This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2077
2078@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2079@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2080This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2081it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2082
252b5132
RH
2083@kindex --whole-archive
2084@cindex including an entire archive
2085@item --whole-archive
2086For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2087@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2088in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2089files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2090library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2091library. This option may be used more than once.
2092
7ec229ce 2093Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2094about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2095Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2096list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2097your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2098
2509a395
SL
2099@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2100@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2101Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2102@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2103undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2104@var{symbol}.
2105
2106This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2107wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2108wishes to call the system function, it should call
2109@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2110
2111Here is a trivial example:
2112
2113@smallexample
2114void *
cc2f008e 2115__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2116@{
cc2f008e 2117 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2118 return __real_malloc (c);
2119@}
2120@end smallexample
2121
ff5dcc92 2122If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2123all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2124instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2125call the real @code{malloc} function.
2126
2127You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2128links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2129you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2130file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2131call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2132
6aa29e7b
JJ
2133@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2134@item --eh-frame-hdr
2135Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2136@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2137
e41b3a13
JJ
2138@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2139@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2140Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2141generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2142if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2143
6c1439be
L
2144@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2145@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2146@item --enable-new-dtags
2147@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2148This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2149systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2150@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2151and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2152If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2153created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2154those options are only available for ELF systems.
2155
2d643429 2156@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2157@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2158Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2159close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2160time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2161increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2162value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2163
fdc90cb4
JJ
2164@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2165@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2166Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2167@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2168new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2169the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2170hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2171
35835446
JR
2172@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2173@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2174This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2175linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2176for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2177about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2178
4f9c04f7 2179Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21801021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2181run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2182has been used.
2183
2184The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2185enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2186
c0065db7
RM
2187@kindex --build-id
2188@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2189@item --build-id
2190@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c
JT
2191Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2192or a @code{.build-id} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2193unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2194@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2195@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2196@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2197the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2198string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2199@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2200is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2201
2202The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2203that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2204unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2205to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2206file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2207string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2208
2209Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2210@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2211@end table
2212
0285c67d
NC
2213@c man end
2214
36f63dca 2215@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2216
0285c67d
NC
2217@c man begin OPTIONS
2218
ff5dcc92 2219The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2220the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2221normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2222use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2223@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2224like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2225symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2226object file).
2227
2228In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2229support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2230PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2231values by either a space or an equals sign.
2232
ff5dcc92 2233@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2234
2235@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2236@item --add-stdcall-alias
2237If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2238as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2239[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2240
2241@kindex --base-file
2242@item --base-file @var{file}
2243Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2244addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2245@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2246[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2247
2248@kindex --dll
2249@item --dll
2250Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2251@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2252file.
bb10df36 2253[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2254
88183869
DK
2255@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2256@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2257@item --enable-long-section-names
2258@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2259The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2260the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2261for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2262fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2263to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2264allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2265disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2266generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2267as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2268with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2269GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2270information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2271option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2272section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2273when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2274image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2275[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2276
252b5132
RH
2277@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2278@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2279@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2280@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2281If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2282do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2283only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2284resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2285undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2286@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2287to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2288warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2289import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2290to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2291feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2292@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2293mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2294[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2295
522f09cd
KT
2296@kindex --leading-underscore
2297@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2298@item --leading-underscore
2299@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2300For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2301in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2302disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2303
252b5132
RH
2304@cindex DLLs, creating
2305@kindex --export-all-symbols
2306@item --export-all-symbols
2307If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2308be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2309otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2310explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2311attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2312option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2313@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2314@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2315exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2316re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2317such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2318@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2319@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2320Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2321not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2322extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2323(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2324These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2325@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2326@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2327@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2328@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2329[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2330
2331@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2332@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2333Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2334exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2335[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2336
2927aaca
NC
2337@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2338@item --exclude-all-symbols
2339Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2340[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2341
252b5132
RH
2342@kindex --file-alignment
2343@item --file-alignment
2344Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2345file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2346512.
bb10df36 2347[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2348
2349@cindex heap size
2350@kindex --heap
2351@item --heap @var{reserve}
2352@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2353Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2354to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2355committed.
bb10df36 2356[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2357
2358@cindex image base
2359@kindex --image-base
2360@item --image-base @var{value}
2361Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2362the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2363is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2364your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2365other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2366for dlls.
bb10df36 2367[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2368
2369@kindex --kill-at
2370@item --kill-at
2371If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2372symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2373[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2374
26d2d8a2
BF
2375@kindex --large-address-aware
2376@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2377If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2378header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2379greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2380or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2381section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2382[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2383
f69a2f97
NC
2384@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2385@item --disable-large-address-aware
2386Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2387This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2388driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2389addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2390[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2391
252b5132
RH
2392@kindex --major-image-version
2393@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2394Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2395[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2396
2397@kindex --major-os-version
2398@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2399Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2400[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2401
2402@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2403@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2404Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2405[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2406
2407@kindex --minor-image-version
2408@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2409Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2410[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2411
2412@kindex --minor-os-version
2413@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2414Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2415[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2416
2417@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2418@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2419Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2420[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2421
2422@cindex DEF files, creating
2423@cindex DLLs, creating
2424@kindex --output-def
2425@item --output-def @var{file}
2426The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2427file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2428(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2429library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2430automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2431[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2432
b044cda1
CW
2433@cindex DLLs, creating
2434@kindex --out-implib
2435@item --out-implib @var{file}
2436The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2437import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2438import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2439may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2440makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2441creation step.
bb10df36 2442[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2443
2444@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2445@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2446@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2447Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2448@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2449By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2450for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2451execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2452[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2453
2454@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2455@item --disable-auto-image-base
2456Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2457user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2458default.
bb10df36 2459[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2460
2461@cindex DLLs, linking to
2462@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2463@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2464When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2465search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2466@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2467between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2468uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2469@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2470[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2471
2472@kindex --enable-auto-import
2473@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2474Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2475DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2476building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2477'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2478to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2479specification published by Microsoft.
2480
e2a83dd0
NC
2481Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2482data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2483placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2484around a problem with consts that is described here:
2485http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2486
4d8907ac
DS
2487Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2488see this message:
0d888aac 2489
ece2d90e 2490"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2491documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2492
ece2d90e
NC
2493This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2494ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2495allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2496fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2497constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2498multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2499this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2500of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2501the warning, and exit.
2502
2503There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2504data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2505
2fa9fc65
NC
2506One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2507of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2508this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2509
c0065db7
RM
2510A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2511that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2512there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2513a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2514
2515@example
2516extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2517extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2518 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2519@end example
2520
2521or
2522
2523@example
2524extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2525extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2526 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2527@end example
2528
c0065db7 2529For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2530is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2531
2532@example
2533extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2534extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2535 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2536@end example
2537
c406afaf
NC
2538or
2539
2540@example
2541extern long long extern_ll;
2542extern_ll -->
2543 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2544@end example
2545
2fa9fc65 2546A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2547'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2548@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2549requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2550building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2551merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2552between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2553constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2554
2555Original:
2556@example
2557--foo.h
2558extern int arr[];
2559--foo.c
2560#include "foo.h"
2561void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2562 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2563@}
2564@end example
2565
2566Solution 1:
2567@example
2568--foo.h
2569extern int arr[];
2570--foo.c
2571#include "foo.h"
2572void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2573 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2574 volatile int *parr = arr;
2575 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2576@}
2577@end example
2578
2579Solution 2:
2580@example
2581--foo.h
2582/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2583#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2584 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2585#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2586#else
2587#define FOO_IMPORT
2588#endif
2589extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2590--foo.c
2591#include "foo.h"
2592void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2593 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2594@}
2595@end example
2596
c0065db7 2597A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2598library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2599for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2600functions).
bb10df36 2601[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2602
2603@kindex --disable-auto-import
2604@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2605Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2606@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2607[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2608
2fa9fc65
NC
2609@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2610@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2611If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2612that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2613a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2614environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2615[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2616
2617@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2618@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2619Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2620DLLs.
bb10df36 2621[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2622
b044cda1
CW
2623@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2624@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2625Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2626[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2627
252b5132
RH
2628@kindex --section-alignment
2629@item --section-alignment
2630Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2631addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2632[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2633
2634@cindex stack size
2635@kindex --stack
2636@item --stack @var{reserve}
2637@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2638Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2639to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2640committed.
bb10df36 2641[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2642
2643@kindex --subsystem
2644@item --subsystem @var{which}
2645@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2646@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2647Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2648legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2649@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2650the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2651@var{which}.
bb10df36 2652[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2653
2f563b51
DK
2654The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2655of the PE file header:
2656[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2657
2d5c3743
NC
2658@kindex --high-entropy-va
2659@item --high-entropy-va
2660Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2661(ASLR).
2662
2f563b51
DK
2663@kindex --dynamicbase
2664@item --dynamicbase
2665The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2666randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2667Vista for i386 PE targets.
2668
2669@kindex --forceinteg
2670@item --forceinteg
2671Code integrity checks are enforced.
2672
2673@kindex --nxcompat
2674@item --nxcompat
2675The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2676This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2677
2678@kindex --no-isolation
2679@item --no-isolation
2680Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2681
2682@kindex --no-seh
2683@item --no-seh
2684The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2685this image.
2686
2687@kindex --no-bind
2688@item --no-bind
2689Do not bind this image.
2690
2691@kindex --wdmdriver
2692@item --wdmdriver
2693The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2694
2f563b51
DK
2695@kindex --tsaware
2696@item --tsaware
2697The image is Terminal Server aware.
2698
0cb112f7
CF
2699@kindex --insert-timestamp
2700@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2701@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2702Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2703as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2704other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2705will result in slightly different images being produced each tiem the
2706same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2707can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2708that binaries produced from indentical sources will compare
2709identically.
252b5132
RH
2710@end table
2711
0285c67d
NC
2712@c man end
2713
ac145307
BS
2714@ifset C6X
2715@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2716
2717@c man begin OPTIONS
2718
2719The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2720libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2721all executables use an index of 0.
2722
2723@table @gcctabopt
2724
2725@kindex --dsbt-size
2726@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2727This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2728or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2729entries.
2730
2731@kindex --dsbt-index
2732@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2733This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2734to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2735executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2736@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2737
fbd9ad90
PB
2738@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2739The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2740exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2741
ac145307
BS
2742@end table
2743
2744@c man end
2745@end ifset
2746
93fd0973
SC
2747@ifset M68HC11
2748@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2749
2750@c man begin OPTIONS
2751
2752The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2753memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2754
2755@table @gcctabopt
2756
2757@kindex --no-trampoline
2758@item --no-trampoline
2759This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2760is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2761instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2762
2763@kindex --bank-window
2764@item --bank-window @var{name}
2765This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2766the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2767The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2768paging and addresses within the memory window.
2769
2770@end table
2771
2772@c man end
2773@end ifset
2774
7fb9f789
NC
2775@ifset M68K
2776@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2777
2778@c man begin OPTIONS
2779
2780The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2781when linking for 68K targets.
2782
2783@table @gcctabopt
2784
2785@kindex --got
2786@item --got=@var{type}
2787This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2788@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2789@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2790Info entry for @file{ld}.
2791
2792@end table
2793
2794@c man end
2795@end ifset
2796
833794fc
MR
2797@ifset MIPS
2798@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2799
2800@c man begin OPTIONS
2801
2802The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2803generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2804
2805@table @gcctabopt
2806
2807@kindex --insn32
2808@item --insn32
2809@kindex --no-insn32
2810@itemx --no-insn32
2811These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2812generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2813or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
281432-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2815used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2816possible.
2817
2818@end table
2819
2820@c man end
2821@end ifset
2822
252b5132
RH
2823@ifset UsesEnvVars
2824@node Environment
2825@section Environment Variables
2826
0285c67d
NC
2827@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2828
560e09e9 2829You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2830@ifclear SingleFormat
2831@code{GNUTARGET},
2832@end ifclear
2833@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2834
36f63dca 2835@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2836@kindex GNUTARGET
2837@cindex default input format
2838@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2839use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2840of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2841@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2842of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2843attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2844this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2845there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2846object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2847BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2848in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2849@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2850
2851@kindex LDEMULATION
2852@cindex default emulation
2853@cindex emulation, default
2854@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2855@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2856behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2857available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2858the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2859variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2860linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2861
2862@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2863@cindex demangling, default
2864Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2865@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2866default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2867a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2868may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2869options.
2870
0285c67d
NC
2871@c man end
2872@end ifset
2873
252b5132
RH
2874@node Scripts
2875@chapter Linker Scripts
2876
2877@cindex scripts
2878@cindex linker scripts
2879@cindex command files
2880Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2881written in the linker command language.
2882
2883The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2884the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2885the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2886more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2887direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2888described below.
2889
2890The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2891yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2892linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2893to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2894such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2895
2896You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2897line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2898default linker script.
2899
2900You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2901to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2902Linker Scripts}.
2903
2904@menu
2905* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2906* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2907* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2908* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2909* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2910* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2911* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2912* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2913* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2914* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2915* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2916@end menu
2917
2918@node Basic Script Concepts
2919@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2920@cindex linker script concepts
2921We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2922describe the linker script language.
2923
2924The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2925file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2926@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2927The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2928purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2929among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2930section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2931in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2932
2933Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2934also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 2935contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
2936the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2937A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2938area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2939loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2940which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2941of debugging information.
2942
2943Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2944first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2945the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2946@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2947section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2948same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2949is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2950(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2951based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2952RAM address would be the VMA.
2953
2954You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2955program with the @samp{-h} option.
2956
2957Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2958@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2959has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2960information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2961will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2962static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2963referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2964
2965You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2966program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2967option.
2968
2969@node Script Format
2970@section Linker Script Format
2971@cindex linker script format
2972Linker scripts are text files.
2973
2974You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2975either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2976symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2977generally ignored.
2978
2979Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2980If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2981otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2982double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2983file name.
2984
2985You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2986@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2987to whitespace.
2988
2989@node Simple Example
2990@section Simple Linker Script Example
2991@cindex linker script example
2992@cindex example of linker script
2993Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2994
2995The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2996@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2997memory layout of the output file.
2998
2999The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3000describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3001code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3002@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3003Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3004your input files.
3005
3006For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
30070x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3008linker script which will do that:
3009@smallexample
3010SECTIONS
3011@{
3012 . = 0x10000;
3013 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3014 . = 0x8000000;
3015 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3016 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3017@}
3018@end smallexample
3019
3020You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3021followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3022descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3023
252b5132
RH
3024The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3025sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3026counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3027other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3028current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3029incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3030@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3031
3032The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3033required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3034after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3035which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3036wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3037means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3038
3039Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3040@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3041@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3042
3043The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3044the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3045at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3046output section, the value of the location counter will be
3047@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3048effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3049immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3050
3051The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3052alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3053example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3054sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3055may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3056sections.
3057
3058That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3059
3060@node Simple Commands
3061@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3062@cindex linker script simple commands
3063In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3064
3065@menu
3066* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3067* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3068@ifclear SingleFormat
3069* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3070@end ifclear
3071
4a93e180 3072* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3073* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3074@end menu
3075
3076@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3077@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3078@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3079@cindex start of execution
3080@cindex first instruction
3081@cindex entry point
3082The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3083point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3084entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3085@smallexample
3086ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3087@end smallexample
3088
3089There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3090entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3091stopping when one of them succeeds:
3092@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3093@item
252b5132 3094the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3095@item
252b5132 3096the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3097@item
3ab904c4
NC
3098the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3099targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3100check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3101@item
252b5132 3102the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3103@item
252b5132
RH
3104The address @code{0}.
3105@end itemize
3106
3107@node File Commands
36f63dca 3108@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3109@cindex linker script file commands
3110Several linker script commands deal with files.
3111
3112@table @code
3113@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3114@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3115@cindex including a linker script
3116Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3117be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3118with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
311910 levels deep.
3120
4006703d
NS
3121You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3122@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3123
252b5132
RH
3124@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3125@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3126@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3127@cindex input files in linker scripts
3128@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3129@cindex linker script input object files
3130The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3131in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3132
3133For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3134a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3135then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3136
3137In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3138script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3139
e3f2db7f
AO
3140In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3141with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3142located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3143for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3144open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3145linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3146description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3147
ff5dcc92 3148If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3149name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3150@samp{-l}.
3151
3152When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3153files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3154script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3155
3156@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3157@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3158@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3159@cindex grouping input files
3160The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3161files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3162new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3163in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3164
b717d30e
JJ
3165@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3166@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3167@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3168This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3169commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3170as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3171with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3172when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3173@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3174and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3175setting afterwards.
3176
252b5132
RH
3177@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3178@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3179@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3180The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3181@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3182@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3183Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3184precedence.
3185
3186You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3187output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3188
3189@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3190@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3191@cindex library search path in linker script
3192@cindex archive search path in linker script
3193@cindex search path in linker script
3194The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3195@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3196@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3197on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3198are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3199the command line option are searched first.
3200
3201@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3202@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3203@cindex first input file
3204The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3205that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3206though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3207when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3208first file.
3209@end table
3210
3211@ifclear SingleFormat
3212@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3213@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3214A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3215
3216@table @code
3217@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3218@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3219@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3220@cindex output file format in linker script
3221The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3222output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3223exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3224(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3225line option takes precedence.
3226
3227You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3228formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3229This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3230desired endianness.
3231
3232If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3233will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3234output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3235used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3236
3237For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3238command:
3239@smallexample
3240OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3241@end smallexample
3242This says that the default format for the output file is
3243@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3244option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3245format.
3246
3247@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3248@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3249@cindex input file format in linker script
3250The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3251files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3252This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3253(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3254is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3255command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3256@end table
3257@end ifclear
3258
4a93e180
NC
3259@node REGION_ALIAS
3260@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3261@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3262@cindex region alias
3263@cindex region names
3264
3265Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3266@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3267
3268@smallexample
3269REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3270@end smallexample
3271
3272The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3273memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3274to memory regions. An example follows.
3275
3276Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3277memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3278that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3279non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3280access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3281read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3282sections:
3283
3284@itemize @bullet
3285@item
3286@code{.text} program code;
3287@item
3288@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3289@item
3290@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3291@item
3292@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3293@end itemize
3294
3295The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3296part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3297output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3298systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3299@code{C}:
3300@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3301@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3302@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3303@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3304@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3305@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3306@end multitable
3307The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3308loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3309the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3310the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3311
3312The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3313includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3314memory layout:
3315@smallexample
3316INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3317
3318SECTIONS
3319 @{
3320 .text :
3321 @{
3322 *(.text)
3323 @} > REGION_TEXT
3324 .rodata :
3325 @{
3326 *(.rodata)
3327 rodata_end = .;
3328 @} > REGION_RODATA
3329 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3330 @{
3331 data_start = .;
3332 *(.data)
3333 @} > REGION_DATA
3334 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3335 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3336 .bss :
3337 @{
3338 *(.bss)
3339 @} > REGION_BSS
3340 @}
3341@end smallexample
3342
3343Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3344regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3345variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3346@table @code
3347@item A
3348Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3349@smallexample
3350MEMORY
3351 @{
3352 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3353 @}
3354
3355REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3356REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3357REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3358REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3359@end smallexample
3360@item B
3361Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3362into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3363@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3364@smallexample
3365MEMORY
3366 @{
3367 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3368 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3369 @}
3370
3371REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3372REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3373REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3374REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3375@end smallexample
3376@item C
3377Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3378@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3379initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3380system start into the @code{RAM}.
3381@smallexample
3382MEMORY
3383 @{
3384 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3385 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3386 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3387 @}
3388
3389REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3390REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3391REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3392REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3393@end smallexample
3394@end table
3395
3396It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3397@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3398necessary:
3399@smallexample
3400#include <string.h>
3401
3402extern char data_start [];
3403extern char data_size [];
3404extern char data_load_start [];
3405
3406void copy_data(void)
3407@{
3408 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3409 @{
3410 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3411 @}
3412@}
3413@end smallexample
3414
252b5132 3415@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3416@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3417There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3418
3419@table @code
3420@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3421@kindex ASSERT
3422@cindex assertion in linker script
3423Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3424with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3425
3426@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3427@kindex EXTERN
3428@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3429Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3430symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3431modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3432each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3433command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3434
3435@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3436@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3437@cindex common allocation in linker script
3438This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3439to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3440output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3441
4818e05f
AM
3442@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3443@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3444@cindex common allocation in linker script
3445This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3446command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3447to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3448
53d25da6
AM
3449@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3450@kindex INSERT
3451@cindex insert user script into default script
3452This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3453augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3454inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3455@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3456default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3457sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3458linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3459insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3460linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3461default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3462of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3463to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3464is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3465
3466@smallexample
3467SECTIONS
3468@{
3469 OVERLAY :
3470 @{
3471 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3472 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3473 @}
3474@}
3475INSERT AFTER .text;
3476@end smallexample
3477
252b5132
RH
3478@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3479@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3480@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3481This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3482references among certain output sections.
3483
3484In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3485using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3486will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3487errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3488a function defined in the other section.
3489
3490The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3491@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3492an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3493@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3494names.
3495
3496@ifclear SingleFormat
3497@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3498@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3499@cindex machine architecture
3500@cindex architecture
3501Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3502of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3503architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3504the @samp{-f} option.
3505@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3506
3507@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3508@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3509This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3510@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3511in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3512@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3513@end table
3514
3515@node Assignments
3516@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3517@cindex assignment in scripts
3518@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3519@cindex variables, defining
3520You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3521the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3522
3523@menu
3524* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3525* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3526* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3527* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3528* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3529@end menu
3530
3531@node Simple Assignments
3532@subsection Simple Assignments
3533
3534You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3535
3536@table @code
3537@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3538@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3539@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3540@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3541@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3542@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3543@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3544@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3545@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3546@end table
3547
3548The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3549@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3550defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3551
3552The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3553may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3554
3555The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3556
3557Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3558
3559You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3560statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3561section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3562
3563The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3564expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3565
3566Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3567assignments may be used:
3568
3569@smallexample
3570floating_point = 0;
3571SECTIONS
3572@{
3573 .text :
3574 @{
3575 *(.text)
3576 _etext = .;
3577 @}
156e34dd 3578 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3579 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3580@}
3581@end smallexample
3582@noindent
3583In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3584zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3585the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3586defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3587upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3588
eb8476a6
MR
3589@node HIDDEN
3590@subsection HIDDEN
3591@cindex HIDDEN
3592For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3593exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3594
3595Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3596@code{HIDDEN}:
3597
3598@smallexample
3599HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3600SECTIONS
3601@{
3602 .text :
3603 @{
3604 *(.text)
3605 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3606 @}
3607 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3608 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3609@}
3610@end smallexample
3611@noindent
3612In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3613
252b5132
RH
3614@node PROVIDE
3615@subsection PROVIDE
3616@cindex PROVIDE
3617In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3618only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3619the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3620@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3621@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3622@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3623@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3624@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3625
3626Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3627@smallexample
3628SECTIONS
3629@{
3630 .text :
3631 @{
3632 *(.text)
3633 _etext = .;
3634 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3635 @}
3636@}
3637@end smallexample
3638
3639In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3640underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3641the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3642underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3643If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3644linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3645
7af8e998
L
3646@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3647@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3648@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3649Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3650hidden and won't be exported.
3651
73ae6183
NC
3652@node Source Code Reference
3653@subsection Source Code Reference
3654
3655Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3656intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3657a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3658symbol that does not have a value.
3659
3660Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3661transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3662stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3663prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3664mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3665of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3666variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3667linker script variable might be referred to as:
3668
3669@smallexample
3670 extern int foo;
3671@end smallexample
3672
3673But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3674
3675@smallexample
3676 _foo = 1000;
3677@end smallexample
3678
3679In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3680transformation has taken place.
3681
3682When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3683things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3684in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3685second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3686table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3687contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3688value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3689
3690@smallexample
3691 int foo = 1000;
3692@end smallexample
3693
10bf6894 3694creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3695holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3696number 1000 is initially stored.
3697
3698When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3699first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3700memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3701So:
3702
3703@smallexample
3704 foo = 1;
3705@end smallexample
3706
3707looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3708associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3709address. Whereas:
3710
3711@smallexample
3712 int * a = & foo;
3713@end smallexample
3714
10bf6894 3715looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3716and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3717the variable @samp{a}.
3718
3719Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3720the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3721an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3722
3723@smallexample
3724 foo = 1000;
3725@end smallexample
3726
3727creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3728the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3729address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3730linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3731access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3732
3733Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3734you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3735use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3736section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3737linker script contains these declarations:
3738
3739@smallexample
3740@group
3741 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3742 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3743 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3744@end group
3745@end smallexample
3746
3747Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3748
3749@smallexample
3750@group
3751 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3752
73ae6183
NC
3753 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3754@end group
3755@end smallexample
3756
3757Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3758
252b5132 3759@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3760@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3761@kindex SECTIONS
3762The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3763into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3764
3765The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3766@smallexample
3767SECTIONS
3768@{
3769 @var{sections-command}
3770 @var{sections-command}
3771 @dots{}
3772@}
3773@end smallexample
3774
3775Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3776
3777@itemize @bullet
3778@item
3779an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3780@item
3781a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3782@item
3783an output section description
3784@item
3785an overlay description
3786@end itemize
3787
3788The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3789@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3790those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3791understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3792the layout of the output file.
3793
3794Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3795below.
3796
3797If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3798linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3799section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3800input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3801example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3802in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3803
3804@menu
3805* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3806* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3807* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3808* Input Section:: Input section description
3809* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3810* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3811* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3812* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3813* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3814@end menu
3815
3816@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3817@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3818The full description of an output section looks like this:
3819@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3820@group
7e7d5768 3821@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 3822 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 3823 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
3824 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3825 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3826 @{
3827 @var{output-section-command}
3828 @var{output-section-command}
3829 @dots{}
abc9061b 3830 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
3831@end group
3832@end smallexample
3833
3834Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3835
3836The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3837name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
3838The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
3839the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
3840The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3841
3842Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3843
3844@itemize @bullet
3845@item
3846a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3847@item
3848an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3849@item
3850data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3851@item
3852a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3853@end itemize
3854
3855@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3856@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3857@cindex name, section
3858@cindex section name
3859The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3860meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3861support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3862must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3863example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3864output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3865names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3866quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3867characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3868commas must be quoted.
3869
3870The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3871Discarding}.
3872
3873@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3874@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3875@cindex address, section
3876@cindex section address
3877The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3878address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3879is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3880
3881If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3882section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3883to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3884alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3885contained within the output section.
3886
3887The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3888
3889@itemize @bullet
3890@item
3891If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3892is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3893in that region.
3894
3895@item
3896If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3897regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3898section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3899be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3900
3901@item
3902If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3903the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3904counter.
3905@end itemize
3906
3907@noindent
3908For example:
3909
252b5132
RH
3910@smallexample
3911.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3912@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3913
252b5132
RH
3914@noindent
3915and
ea5cae92 3916
252b5132
RH
3917@smallexample
3918.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3919@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3920
252b5132
RH
3921@noindent
3922are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3923@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3924counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3925counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3926input sections.
252b5132
RH
3927
3928The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3929For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3930so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3931do something like this:
3932@smallexample
3933.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3934@end smallexample
3935@noindent
3936This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3937aligned upward to the specified value.
3938
3939Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3940location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3941sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3942
3943@node Input Section
36f63dca 3944@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3945@cindex input sections
3946@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3947The most common output section command is an input section description.
3948
3949The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3950You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3951in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3952map the input files into your memory layout.
3953
3954@menu
3955* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3956* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3957* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3958* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3959* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3960@end menu
3961
3962@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3963@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3964@cindex input section basics
3965An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3966by a list of section names in parentheses.
3967
3968The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3969describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3970
3971The most common input section description is to include all input
3972sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3973include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3974@smallexample
3975*(.text)
3976@end smallexample
3977@noindent
18625d54
CM
3978Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3979of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3980match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3981example:
252b5132 3982@smallexample
b4346c09 3983*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3984@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3985will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3986@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3987
3988There are two ways to include more than one section:
3989@smallexample
3990*(.text .rdata)
3991*(.text) *(.rdata)
3992@end smallexample
3993@noindent
3994The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3995@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3996first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3997they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3998@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3999@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4000
4001You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4002You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4003needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4004@smallexample
4005data.o(.data)
4006@end smallexample
4007
ae17ab41
CM
4008To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4009of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4010
4011Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4012
4013@smallexample
4014@group
4015SECTIONS @{
4016 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4017 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4018@}
4019@end group
4020@end smallexample
4021
4022In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4023input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4024@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4025@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4026whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4027
967928e9
AM
4028You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4029matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4030with no whitespace around the colon.
4031
4032@table @samp
4033@item archive:file
4034matches file within archive
4035@item archive:
4036matches the whole archive
4037@item :file
4038matches file but not one in an archive
4039@end table
4040
4041Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4042wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4043single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4044@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4045within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4046also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4047other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4048from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4049command.
4050
252b5132
RH
4051If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4052the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4053commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4054@smallexample
4055data.o
4056@end smallexample
4057
967928e9
AM
4058When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4059and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4060characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4061name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4062did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4063though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4064@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4065the archive search path.
4066
4067@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4068@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4069@cindex input section wildcards
4070@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4071@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4072@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4073In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4074name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4075
4076The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4077pattern for the file name.
4078
4079The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4080
4081@table @samp
4082@item *
4083matches any number of characters
4084@item ?
4085matches any single character
4086@item [@var{chars}]
4087matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4088character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4089@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4090@item \
4091quotes the following character
4092@end table
4093
4094When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4095will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4096Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4097exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4098@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4099a @samp{/} character.
4100
4101File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4102specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4103does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4104
4105If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4106appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4107will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4108sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4109@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4110@smallexample
4111.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4112.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4113@end smallexample
4114
bcaa7b3e 4115@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4116Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4117in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4118this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4119pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4120@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4121into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4122
bcaa7b3e
L
4123@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4124@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4125difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4126descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4127Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4128reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4129
02ecc8e9
L
4130@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4131@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4132difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4133ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4134encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4135
bcaa7b3e
L
4136@cindex SORT
4137@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4138
4139When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4140can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4141
4142@enumerate
4143@item
4144@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4145It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4146sections have the same name.
4147@item
4148@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4149It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4150sections have the same alignment.
4151@item
c0065db7 4152@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4153treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4154@item
4155@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4156is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4157@item
4158All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4159@end enumerate
4160
4161When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4162section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4163takes precedence over the command line option.
4164
4165If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4166command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4167treated as nested sorting command.
4168
4169@enumerate
4170@item
4171@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4172@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4173@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4174@item
4175@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4176@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4177@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4178@end enumerate
4179
4180If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4181command line option will be ignored.
4182
eda680f8
L
4183@cindex SORT_NONE
4184@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4185section sorting option.
4186
252b5132
RH
4187If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4188@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4189precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4190
4191This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4192files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4193sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4194The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4195with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4196linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4197@smallexample
4198@group
4199SECTIONS @{
4200 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4201 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4202 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4203 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4204@}
4205@end group
4206@end smallexample
4207
4208@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4209@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4210@cindex common symbol placement
4211@cindex uninitialized data placement
4212A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4213file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4214linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4215named @samp{COMMON}.
4216
4217You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4218other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4219particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4220input files are placed in another section.
4221
4222In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4223@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4224@smallexample
4225.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4226@end smallexample
4227
4228@cindex scommon section
4229@cindex small common symbols
4230Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4231example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4232symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4233different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4234the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4235symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4236to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4237locations.
4238
4239@cindex [COMMON]
4240You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4241notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4242@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4243
4244@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4245@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4246@cindex KEEP
4247@cindex garbage collection
4248When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4249it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4250This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4251with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4252@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4253
4254@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4255@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4256The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4257to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4258start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4259@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4260follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4261@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4262@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4263All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4264files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4265
4266@smallexample
4267@group
4268SECTIONS @{
4269 outputa 0x10000 :
4270 @{
4271 all.o
4272 foo.o (.input1)
4273 @}
36f63dca
NC
4274@end group
4275@group
252b5132
RH
4276 outputb :
4277 @{
4278 foo.o (.input2)
4279 foo1.o (.input1)
4280 @}
36f63dca
NC
4281@end group
4282@group
252b5132
RH
4283 outputc :
4284 @{
4285 *(.input1)
4286 *(.input2)
4287 @}
4288@}
4289@end group
a1ab1d2a 4290@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4291
4292@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4293@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4294@cindex data
4295@cindex section data
4296@cindex output section data
4297@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4298@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4299@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4300@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4301@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4302You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4303@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4304an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4305parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4306value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4307counter.
4308
4309The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4310store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4311bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4312stored.
4313
4314For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4315of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4316@smallexample
4317BYTE(1)
4318LONG(addr)
4319@end smallexample
4320
4321When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4322same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4323target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4324@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4325@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4326
4327If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4328which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4329When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4330true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4331endianness of the first input object file.
4332
36f63dca 4333Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4334between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4335@smallexample
4336SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4337@end smallexample
4338whereas this will work:
4339@smallexample
4340SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4341@end smallexample
4342
252b5132
RH
4343@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4344@cindex holes, filling
4345@cindex unspecified memory
4346You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4347current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4348otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4349gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4350with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4351necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4352point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4353than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4354different parts of an output section.
4355
4356This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4357value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4358@smallexample
563e308f 4359FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4360@end smallexample
4361
4362The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4363section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4364part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4365entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4366precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4367expression.
252b5132
RH
4368
4369@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4370@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4371There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4372commands.
4373
4374@table @code
4375@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4376@cindex input filename symbols
4377@cindex filename symbols
4378@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4379The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4380The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4381file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4382the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4383
4384This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4385normally used for any other object file format.
4386
4387@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4388@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4389@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4390@item CONSTRUCTORS
4391When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4392unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4393destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4394arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4395automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4396For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4397linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4398@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4399ignored for other object file formats.
4400
4401The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4402constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4403Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4404the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4405first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4406of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4407compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4408formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4409@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4410the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4411destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4412@code{exit}.
4413
4414For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4415arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4416addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4417and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4418linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4419runtime code expects to see.
4420
4421@smallexample
4422 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4423 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4424 *(.ctors)
4425 LONG(0)
4426 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4427 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4428 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4429 *(.dtors)
4430 LONG(0)
4431 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4432@end smallexample
4433
4434If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4435which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4436are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4437are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4438command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4439@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4440@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4441@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4442
4443Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4444and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4445need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4446scripts.
4447
4448@end table
4449
4450@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4451@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4452@cindex discarding sections
4453@cindex sections, discarding
4454@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4455The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4456This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4457may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4458@smallexample
49c13adb 4459.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4460@end smallexample
4461@noindent
4462will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4463@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4464sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4465space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4466too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4467space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4468@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4469@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4470This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4471
a0976ea4 4472The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4473on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4474symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4475the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4476section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4477
4478@cindex /DISCARD/
4479The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4480input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4481section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4482
4483@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4484@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4485@cindex output section attributes
4486We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4487like this:
0c71d759 4488
252b5132 4489@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4490@group
7e7d5768 4491@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4492 [AT(@var{lma})]
4493 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4494 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4495 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4496 @{
4497 @var{output-section-command}
4498 @var{output-section-command}
4499 @dots{}
562d3460 4500 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4501@end group
4502@end smallexample
0c71d759 4503
252b5132
RH
4504We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4505@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4506remaining section attributes.
4507
a1ab1d2a 4508@menu
252b5132
RH
4509* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4510* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4511* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4512* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4513* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4514* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4515* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4516* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4517@end menu
4518
4519@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4520@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4521Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4522parentheses. The following types are defined:
4523
4524@table @code
4525@item NOLOAD
4526The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4527loaded into memory when the program is run.
4528@item DSECT
4529@itemx COPY
4530@itemx INFO
4531@itemx OVERLAY
4532These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4533rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4534marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4535section when the program is run.
4536@end table
4537
4538@kindex NOLOAD
4539@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4540@cindex loading, preventing
4541The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4542the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4543the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4544@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4545need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4546@smallexample
4547@group
4548SECTIONS @{
4549 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4550 @dots{}
4551@}
4552@end group
4553@end smallexample
4554
4555@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4556@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4557@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4558@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4559@cindex load address
4560@cindex section load address
4561Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4562@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4563@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4564specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4565address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4566
ea5cae92
NC
4567The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4568specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4569takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4570load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4571region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4572
4573If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4574section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4575load address:
4576
4577@itemize @bullet
4578@item
4579If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4580the LMA address as well.
4581
4582@item
4583If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4584
4585@item
4586Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4587with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4588section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4589VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4590the last section in the located region.
4591
4592@item
4593If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4594that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4595
4596@item
4597If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4598section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4599@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4600
4601@cindex ROM initialized data
4602@cindex initialized data in ROM
4603This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4604example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4605called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4606@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4607even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4608uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4609defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4610counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4611
4612@smallexample
4613@group
4614SECTIONS
4615 @{
4616 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4617 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4618 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4619 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4620 .bss 0x3000 :
4621 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4622@}
4623@end group
4624@end smallexample
4625
4626The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4627this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4628the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4629how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4630script.
4631
4632@smallexample
4633@group
4634extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4635char *src = &_etext;
4636char *dst = &_data;
4637
ea5cae92
NC
4638/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4639while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4640 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4641
ea5cae92 4642/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4643for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4644 *dst = 0;
4645@end group
4646@end smallexample
4647
bbf115d3
L
4648@node Forced Output Alignment
4649@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4650@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4651@cindex forcing output section alignment
4652@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4653You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4654alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4655intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4656
7e7d5768
AM
4657@node Forced Input Alignment
4658@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4659@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4660@cindex forcing input section alignment
4661@cindex input section alignment
4662You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4663SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4664sections, whether larger or smaller.
4665
0c71d759
NC
4666@node Output Section Constraint
4667@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4668@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4669@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4670@cindex constraints on output sections
4671You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4672of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4673read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4674@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4675
252b5132 4676@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4677@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4678@kindex >@var{region}
4679@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4680@cindex memory regions and sections
4681You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4682using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4683
4684Here is a simple example:
4685@smallexample
4686@group
4687MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4688SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4689@end group
4690@end smallexample
4691
4692@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4693@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4694@kindex :@var{phdr}
4695@cindex section, assigning to program header
4696@cindex program headers and sections
4697You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4698using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4699one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4700assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4701@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4702linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4703
4704Here is a simple example:
4705@smallexample
4706@group
4707PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4708SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4709@end group
4710@end smallexample
4711
4712@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4713@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4714@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4715@cindex section fill pattern
4716@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4717You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4718@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4719(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4720within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4721alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4722necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4723of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4724an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4725fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4726other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4727pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4728expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4729
4730You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4731output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4732
4733Here is a simple example:
4734@smallexample
4735@group
563e308f 4736SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4737@end group
4738@end smallexample
4739
4740@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4741@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4742@kindex OVERLAY
4743@cindex overlays
4744An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4745are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4746the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4747copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4748required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4749can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4750than another.
4751
4752Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4753@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4754output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4755command is as follows:
4756@smallexample
4757@group
4758OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4759 @{
4760 @var{secname1}
4761 @{
4762 @var{output-section-command}
4763 @var{output-section-command}
4764 @dots{}
4765 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4766 @var{secname2}
4767 @{
4768 @var{output-section-command}
4769 @var{output-section-command}
4770 @dots{}
4771 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4772 @dots{}
abc9061b 4773 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4774@end group
4775@end smallexample
4776
4777Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4778section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4779section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4780those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4781except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4782sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4783
abc9061b
CC
4784The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4785the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4786
252b5132
RH
4787The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4788addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4789memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4790whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4791and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4792and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4793
56dd11f0
NC
4794If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4795references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4796the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4797sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4798@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4799
4800For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4801provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4802defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4803@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4804the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4805within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4806symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4807
4808At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4809the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4810
4811Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4812@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4813@smallexample
4814@group
4815 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4816 @{
4817 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4818 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4819 @}
4820@end group
4821@end smallexample
4822@noindent
4823This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4824address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4825@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4826following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4827@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4828@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4829
4830C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4831like the following.
4832
4833@smallexample
4834@group
4835 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4836 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4837 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4838@end group
4839@end smallexample
4840
4841Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4842everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4843example could have been written identically as follows.
4844
4845@smallexample
4846@group
4847 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4848 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4849 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4850 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4851 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4852 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4853 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4854@end group
4855@end smallexample
4856
4857@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4858@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4859@kindex MEMORY
4860@cindex memory regions
4861@cindex regions of memory
4862@cindex allocating memory
4863@cindex discontinuous memory
4864The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4865memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4866
4867The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4868memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4869may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4870can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4871set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4872regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4873around to fit into the available regions.
4874
4875A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4876command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4877you wish. The syntax is:
4878@smallexample
4879@group
a1ab1d2a 4880MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4881 @{
4882 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4883 @dots{}
4884 @}
4885@end group
4886@end smallexample
4887
4888The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4889region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4890Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4891with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4892must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4893add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 4894command.
252b5132
RH
4895
4896@cindex memory region attributes
4897The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4898whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4899not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4900@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4901section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4902the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4903them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4904
4905The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4906@table @samp
4907@item R
4908Read-only section
4909@item W
4910Read/write section
4911@item X
4912Executable section
4913@item A
4914Allocatable section
4915@item I
4916Initialized section
4917@item L
4918Same as @samp{I}
4919@item !
c09e9a8c 4920Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4921@end table
4922
4923If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4924@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4925attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4926in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4927attributes.
4928
4929@kindex ORIGIN =
4930@kindex o =
4931@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4932The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4933the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4934cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4935abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4936@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4937
4938@kindex LENGTH =
4939@kindex len =
4940@kindex l =
4941The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4942region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4943be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4944@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4945
4946In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4947available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4948and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4949linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4950is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4951or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4952explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4953region.
4954
4955@smallexample
4956@group
a1ab1d2a 4957MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4958 @{
4959 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4960 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4961 @}
4962@end group
4963@end smallexample
4964
4965Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4966specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4967@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4968a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4969output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4970was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4971the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4972output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4973region, the linker will issue an error message.
4974
3ec57632 4975It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4976expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4977@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4978
4979@smallexample
4980@group
c0065db7 4981 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4982@end group
4983@end smallexample
4984
252b5132
RH
4985@node PHDRS
4986@section PHDRS Command
4987@kindex PHDRS
4988@cindex program headers
4989@cindex ELF program headers
4990@cindex program segments
4991@cindex segments, ELF
4992The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4993@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4994loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4995program with the @samp{-p} option.
4996
4997When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4998reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4999program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5000This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5001interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5002
5003The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5004in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5005precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5006the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5007not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5008
5009The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5010generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5011ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5012
5013This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5014@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5015
5016@smallexample
5017@group
5018PHDRS
5019@{
5020 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5021 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5022@}
5023@end group
5024@end smallexample
5025
5026The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5027of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5028header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5029with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5030must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5031is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5032
5033Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5034system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5035specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5036sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5037attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5038Section Phdr}.
5039
5040It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5041merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5042repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5043contain the section.
5044
5045If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5046then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5047not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5048convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5049placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5050default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5051segment at all.
5052
5053@kindex FILEHDR
5054@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5055You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5056the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5057The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5058file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5059include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5060segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5061these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5062
5063The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5064value of the keyword.
5065
5066@table @asis
5067@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5068Indicates an unused program header.
5069
5070@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5071Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5072the file.
5073
5074@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5075Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5076
5077@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5078Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5079found.
5080
5081@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5082Indicates a segment holding note information.
5083
5084@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5085A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5086ABI.
5087
5088@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5089Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5090
5091@item @var{expression}
5092An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5093be used for types not defined above.
5094@end table
5095
5096You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5097in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5098@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5099Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5100output section attribute.
5101
5102The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5103which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5104explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5105an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5106header.
5107
5108Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5109headers used on a native ELF system.
5110
5111@example
5112@group
5113PHDRS
5114@{
5115 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5116 interp PT_INTERP ;
5117 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5118 data PT_LOAD ;
5119 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5120@}
5121
5122SECTIONS
5123@{
5124 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5125 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5126 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5127 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5128 @dots{}
5129 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5130 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5131 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5132 @dots{}
5133@}
5134@end group
5135@end example
5136
5137@node VERSION
5138@section VERSION Command
5139@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5140@cindex symbol versions
5141@cindex version script
5142@cindex versions of symbols
5143The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5144only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5145symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5146a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5147shared library.
5148
5149You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5150you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5151also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5152
5153The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5154@smallexample
5155VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5156@end smallexample
5157
5158The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5159Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5160version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5161version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5162version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5163scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5164library.
5165
5166The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5167examples.
5168
5169@smallexample
5170VERS_1.1 @{
5171 global:
5172 foo1;
5173 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5174 old*;
5175 original*;
5176 new*;
252b5132
RH
5177@};
5178
5179VERS_1.2 @{
5180 foo2;
5181@} VERS_1.1;
5182
5183VERS_2.0 @{
5184 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5185 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5186 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5187 "f(int, double)";
5188 @};
252b5132
RH
5189@} VERS_1.2;
5190@end smallexample
5191
5192This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5193version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5194The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5195a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5196of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5197symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5198is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5199in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5200However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5201name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5202
5203Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5204depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5205to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5206
5207Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5208depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5209and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5210
5211When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5212specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5213unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5214unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5215somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5216wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5217wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5218set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5219ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5220
5221The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5222they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5223could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5224However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5225
0f6bf451 5226Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5227in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5228symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5229won't.
5230
5231@smallexample
7c9c73be 5232@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5233@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5234
252b5132
RH
5235When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5236symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5237requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5238shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5239loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5240linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5241application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5242way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5243all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5244search for each symbol reference.
5245
5246The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5247doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5248that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5249functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5250the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5251required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5252that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5253versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5254the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5255
5256There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5257first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5258source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5259script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5260maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5261@smallexample
5262__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5263@end smallexample
5264@noindent
5265in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5266be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5267The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5268@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5269takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5270
5271The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5272function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5273an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5274version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5275linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5276
5277To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5278source file. Here is an example:
5279
5280@smallexample
5281__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5282__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5283__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5284__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5285@end smallexample
5286
5287In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5288unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5289example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5290@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5291
5292When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5293some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5294this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5295@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5296declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5297you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5298
5299If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5300within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5301(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5302specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5303
cb840a31
L
5304You can also specify the language in the version script:
5305
5306@smallexample
5307VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5308@end smallexample
5309
c0065db7 5310The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5311The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5312demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5313patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5314@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5315
86043bbb
MM
5316Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5317described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5318or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5319the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5320whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5321cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5322might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5323should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5324expect when you upgrade.
5325
252b5132
RH
5326@node Expressions
5327@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5328@cindex expressions
5329@cindex arithmetic
5330The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5331that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5332expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5333host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5334
5335You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5336
5337The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5338expressions.
5339
5340@menu
5341* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5342* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5343* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5344* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5345* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5346* Operators:: Operators
5347* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5348* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5349* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5350@end menu
5351
5352@node Constants
5353@subsection Constants
5354@cindex integer notation
5355@cindex constants in linker scripts
5356All constants are integers.
5357
5358As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5359octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5360hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5361@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5362@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5363value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5364
5365@cindex scaled integers
5366@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5367@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5368@cindex suffixes for integers
5369@cindex integer suffixes
5370In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5371constant by
5372@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5373@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5374@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5375@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5376@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5377@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5378@tex
5379${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5380@end tex
5381@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5382respectively. For example, the following
5383all refer to the same quantity:
5384
252b5132 5385@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5386_fourk_1 = 4K;
5387_fourk_2 = 4096;
5388_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5389_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5390@end smallexample
5391
8a308ae8
NC
5392Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5393conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5394
0c71d759
NC
5395@node Symbolic Constants
5396@subsection Symbolic Constants
5397@cindex symbolic constants
5398@kindex CONSTANT
5399It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5400the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5401
5402@table @code
5403@item MAXPAGESIZE
5404@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5405The target's maximum page size.
5406
5407@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5408@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5409The target's default page size.
5410@end table
5411
5412So for example:
5413
5414@smallexample
9d5777a3 5415 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5416@end smallexample
5417
5418will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5419supported by the target.
5420
252b5132
RH
5421@node Symbols
5422@subsection Symbol Names
5423@cindex symbol names
5424@cindex names
5425@cindex quoted symbol names
5426@kindex "
5427Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5428and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5429Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5430specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5431keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5432@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5433"SECTION" = 9;
5434"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5435@end smallexample
5436
5437Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5438to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5439whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5440
ecca9871
L
5441@node Orphan Sections
5442@subsection Orphan Sections
5443@cindex orphan
5444Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5445are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5446script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5447output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5448placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5449attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5450same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5451If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5452at the end of the file.
5453
5454For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5455well as section flag.
5456
41911f68 5457If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5458the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5459__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5460section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5461orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5462representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5463character.
5464
252b5132
RH
5465@node Location Counter
5466@subsection The Location Counter
5467@kindex .
5468@cindex dot
5469@cindex location counter
5470@cindex current output location
5471The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5472current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5473location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5474within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5475anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5476
5477@cindex holes
5478Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5479moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5480location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5481and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5482doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5483
5484@smallexample
5485SECTIONS
5486@{
5487 output :
5488 @{
5489 file1(.text)
5490 . = . + 1000;
5491 file2(.text)
5492 . += 1000;
5493 file3(.text)
563e308f 5494 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5495@}
5496@end smallexample
5497@noindent
5498In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5499located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5500followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5501@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5502@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5503specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5504
5c6bbab8
NC
5505@cindex dot inside sections
5506Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5507current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5508statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5509absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5510however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5511not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5512
5513@smallexample
5514SECTIONS
5515@{
5516 . = 0x100
5517 .text: @{
5518 *(.text)
5519 . = 0x200
5520 @}
5521 . = 0x500
5522 .data: @{
5523 *(.data)
5524 . += 0x600
5525 @}
5526@}
5527@end smallexample
5528
5529The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5530and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5531the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5532much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5533move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5534and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5535the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5536the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5537
b5666f2f
AM
5538@cindex dot outside sections
5539Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5540output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5541needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5542
5543@smallexample
5544SECTIONS
5545@{
5546 start_of_text = . ;
5547 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5548 end_of_text = . ;
5549
5550 start_of_data = . ;
5551 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5552 end_of_data = . ;
5553@}
5554@end smallexample
5555
5556If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5557not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5558between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5559should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5560blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5561the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5562sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5563statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5564special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5565place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5566as follows:
5567
5568@smallexample
5569SECTIONS
5570@{
5571 start_of_text = . ;
5572 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5573 end_of_text = . ;
5574
5575 start_of_data = . ;
5576 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5577 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5578 end_of_data = . ;
5579@}
5580@end smallexample
5581
5582This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5583@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5584placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5585assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5586a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5587section. So you could write:
5588
5589@smallexample
5590SECTIONS
5591@{
5592 start_of_text = . ;
5593 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5594 end_of_text = . ;
5595
5596 . = . ;
5597 start_of_data = . ;
5598 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5599 end_of_data = . ;
5600@}
5601@end smallexample
5602
5603Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5604@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5605
252b5132
RH
5606@need 2000
5607@node Operators
5608@subsection Operators
5609@cindex operators for arithmetic
5610@cindex arithmetic operators
5611@cindex precedence in expressions
5612The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5613the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5614@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5615@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5616@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5617@smallexample
5618precedence associativity Operators Notes
5619(highest)
56201 left ! - ~ (1)
56212 left * / %
56223 left + -
56234 left >> <<
56245 left == != > < <= >=
56256 left &
56267 left |
56278 left &&
56289 left ||
562910 right ? :
563011 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5631(lowest)
5632@end smallexample
5633Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5634(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5635(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5636@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5637@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5638@tex
5639\vskip \baselineskip
5640%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5641\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5642\hrule
5643\halign
5644{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5645height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5646&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5647height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5648\noalign{\hrule}
5649height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5650&highest&&&&&\cr
5651% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5652&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5653&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5654&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5655&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5656&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5657&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5658&7&&left&&|&\cr
5659&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5660&9&&left&&||&\cr
5661&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5662&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5663&lowest&&&&&\cr
5664height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5665\hrule}
5666@end tex
5667@iftex
5668{
5669@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5670@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5671@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5672}
5673@end iftex
5674@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5675
5676@node Evaluation
5677@subsection Evaluation
5678@cindex lazy evaluation
5679@cindex expression evaluation order
5680The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5681an expression when absolutely necessary.
5682
5683The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5684address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5685regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5686as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5687
5688However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5689until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5690other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5691for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5692
5693The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5694assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5695allocation.
5696
5697Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5698@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5699
5700If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5701available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5702following
5703@smallexample
5704@group
5705SECTIONS
5706 @{
a1ab1d2a 5707 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5708 @{ *(.text) @}
5709 @}
5710@end group
5711@end smallexample
5712@noindent
5713will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5714address}.
5715
5716@node Expression Section
5717@subsection The Section of an Expression
5718@cindex expression sections
5719@cindex absolute expressions
5720@cindex relative expressions
5721@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5722@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5723@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5724Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5725relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5726using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5727value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5728symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5729operations.
5730
abf4be64
AM
5731Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5732section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5733address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5734@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5735functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5736One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5737(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5738differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5739versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5740section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5741Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5742absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5743given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5744everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5745
5746In the following simple example,
252b5132 5747
7542af2a
AM
5748@smallexample
5749@group
5750SECTIONS
5751 @{
5752 . = 0x100;
5753 __executable_start = 0x100;
5754 .data :
5755 @{
5756 . = 0x10;
5757 __data_start = 0x10;
5758 *(.data)
5759 @}
5760 @dots{}
5761 @}
5762@end group
5763@end smallexample
252b5132 5764
7542af2a
AM
5765both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5766address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5767@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5768section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5769
5c3049d2
AM
5770For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5771addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5772
5773@itemize @bullet
5774@item
c05f749e
AM
5775Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5776operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5777absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5778@item
7542af2a
AM
5779Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5780relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5781and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5782@item
c05f749e
AM
5783Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5784in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5785address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5786before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5787@end itemize
5788
5789The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5790
5791@itemize @bullet
5792@item
5793An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5794@item
5795The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5796@item
9bc8bb33 5797The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5798relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5799(after above conversions) is also a number.
5800@item
5801The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5802relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5803section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5804@item
5805The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5806conversions) is an absolute address.
5807@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5808
5809You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5810to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5811create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5812section @samp{.data}:
5813@smallexample
5814SECTIONS
5815 @{
5816 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5817 @}
5818@end smallexample
5819@noindent
5820If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5821@samp{.data} section.
5822
7542af2a
AM
5823Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5824particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5825
252b5132
RH
5826@node Builtin Functions
5827@subsection Builtin Functions
5828@cindex functions in expressions
5829The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5830use in linker script expressions.
5831
5832@table @code
5833@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5834@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5835@cindex expression, absolute
5836Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5837of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5838value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5839normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5840
5841@item ADDR(@var{section})
5842@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5843@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5844Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5845script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5846the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5847@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5848@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5849the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5850@smallexample
5851@group
5852SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5853 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5854 @{
252b5132
RH
5855 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5856 @dots{}
5857 @}
5858 .output :
5859 @{
5860 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5861 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5862 @}
5863@dots{} @}
5864@end group
5865@end smallexample
5866
876f4090
NS
5867@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5868@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5869@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5870@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5871@cindex round up location counter
5872@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5873@cindex round up expression
5874@cindex align expression
5875Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5876to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5877doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5878arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5879expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5880equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5881
5882Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5883next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5884variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5885input sections:
252b5132
RH
5886@smallexample
5887@group
5888SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5889 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5890 *(.data)
5891 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5892 @}
5893@dots{} @}
5894@end group
5895@end smallexample
5896@noindent
5897The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5898a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5899a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5900of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5901
5902The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5903
362c1d1a
NS
5904@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5905@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5906@cindex section alignment
5907Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5908been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5909evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5910the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5911value in that section.
5912@smallexample
5913@group
5914SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5915 .output @{
5916 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5917 @dots{}
5918 @}
5919@dots{} @}
5920@end group
5921@end smallexample
5922
252b5132
RH
5923@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5924@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5925This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5926scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5927section.
5928
2d20f7bf
JJ
5929@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5930@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5931This is equivalent to either
5932@smallexample
5933(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5934@end smallexample
5935or
5936@smallexample
5937(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5938@end smallexample
5939@noindent
5940depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5941for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5942@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5943If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5944memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5945bytes in the on-disk file.
5946
5947This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5948any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5949@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5950be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5951working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5952
5953@noindent
5954Example:
5955@smallexample
5956 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5957@end smallexample
5958
5959@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5960@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5961This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5962evaluation purposes.
5963
5964@smallexample
5965 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5966@end smallexample
5967
a4f5ad88
JJ
5968@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5969@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5970This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 5971@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
5972When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5973does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5974@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5975boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5976it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
5977@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
5978padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
5979section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
5980
5981@smallexample
5982 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5983@end smallexample
5984
252b5132
RH
5985@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5986@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5987@cindex symbol defaults
5988Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5989defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5990return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5991default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5992shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5993the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5994existed, its value is preserved:
5995
5996@smallexample
5997@group
5998SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5999 .text : @{
6000 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6001 @dots{}
6002 @}
6003 @dots{}
6004@}
6005@end group
6006@end smallexample
6007
3ec57632
NC
6008@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6009@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6010Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6011
252b5132
RH
6012@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6013@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6014@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6015Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6016Section LMA}).
6017
2e53f7d6
NC
6018@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6019@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6020Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6021@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6022
252b5132
RH
6023@kindex MAX
6024@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6025Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6026
6027@kindex MIN
6028@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6029Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6030
6031@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6032@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6033@cindex unallocated address, next
6034Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6035This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6036use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6037output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6038
3ec57632
NC
6039@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6040@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6041Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6042
ba916c8a
MM
6043@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6044@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6045Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6046value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6047@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6048will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6049can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6050``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6051name.
6052
252b5132
RH
6053@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6054@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6055@cindex section size
6056Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6057been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6058evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6059@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6060@smallexample
6061@group
6062SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6063 .output @{
6064 .start = . ;
6065 @dots{}
6066 .end = . ;
6067 @}
6068 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6069 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6070@dots{} @}
6071@end group
6072@end smallexample
6073
6074@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6075@itemx sizeof_headers
6076@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6077@cindex header size
6078Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6079information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6080this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6081choose, to facilitate paging.
6082
6083@cindex not enough room for program headers
6084@cindex program headers, not enough room
6085When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6086@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6087number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6088addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6089additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6090room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6091the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6092script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6093you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6094command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6095@end table
6096
6097@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6098@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6099@cindex implicit linker scripts
6100If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6101an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6102linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6103linker will report an error.
6104
6105An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6106
6107Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6108assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6109commands.
6110
6111Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6112at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6113read. This can affect archive searching.
6114
6115@ifset GENERIC
6116@node Machine Dependent
6117@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6118
6119@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6120@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6121sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6122functionality are not listed.
6123
6124@menu
36f63dca
NC
6125@ifset H8300
6126* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6127@end ifset
6128@ifset I960
6129* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6130@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6131@ifset M68HC11
6132* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6133@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6134@ifset ARM
6135* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6136@end ifset
6137@ifset HPPA
6138* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6139@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6140@ifset M68K
6141* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6142@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6143@ifset MIPS
6144* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6145@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6146@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6147* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6148@end ifset
2469cfa2 6149@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6150* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6151@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6152@ifset NDS32
6153* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6154@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6155@ifset NIOSII
6156* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6157@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6158@ifset POWERPC
6159* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6160@end ifset
6161@ifset POWERPC64
6162* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6163@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6164@ifset SPU
6165* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6166@end ifset
74459f0e 6167@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6168* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6169@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6170@ifset WIN32
6171* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6172@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6173@ifset XTENSA
6174* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6175@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6176@end menu
6177@end ifset
6178
252b5132
RH
6179@ifset H8300
6180@ifclear GENERIC
6181@raisesections
6182@end ifclear
6183
6184@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6185@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6186
6187@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6188For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6189you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6190
6191@table @emph
6192@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6193@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6194@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6195targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6196program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6197respectively.
6198
6199@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6200@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6201@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6202@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6203sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6204page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6205(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6206@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6207top page of memory).
1502569c 6208
81f5558e
NC
6209@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6210indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6211displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6212the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6213@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6214whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6215range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6216
1502569c 6217@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6218@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6219biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6220which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6221page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6222(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6223@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6224the top page of memory).
6225
6226@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6227@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
622832 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6229changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6230(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6231@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6232the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6233@end table
6234
6235@ifclear GENERIC
6236@lowersections
6237@end ifclear
6238@end ifset
6239
36f63dca 6240@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6241@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6242@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6243@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6244@node Renesas
6245@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6246
c2dcd04e
NC
6247@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6248H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6249options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6250@end ifset
6251@end ifclear
6252
6253@ifset I960
6254@ifclear GENERIC
6255@raisesections
6256@end ifclear
6257
6258@node i960
6259@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6260
6261@cindex i960 support
6262
6263You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6264specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6265family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6266incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6267linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6268libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6269search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6270
6271For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6272well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6273paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6274the names
6275
6276@smallexample
6277@group
6278try
6279libtry.a
6280tryca
6281libtryca.a
6282@end group
6283@end smallexample
6284
6285@noindent
6286The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6287two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6288
6289You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6290the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6291use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6292specifies a library.
6293
6294@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6295@cindex relaxing on i960
6296@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6297you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6298@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6299them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6300instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6301instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6302target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6303not itself call any subroutines).
6304
6305@ifclear GENERIC
6306@lowersections
6307@end ifclear
6308@end ifset
6309
6310@ifset ARM
6311@ifclear GENERIC
6312@raisesections
6313@end ifclear
6314
93fd0973
SC
6315@ifset M68HC11
6316@ifclear GENERIC
6317@raisesections
6318@end ifclear
6319
6320@node M68HC11/68HC12
6321@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6322
6323@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6324
6325@subsection Linker Relaxation
6326
6327For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6328optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6329
6330@table @emph
6331@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6332@item relaxing address modes
6333@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6334targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6335program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6336respectively.
6337
6338@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6339transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6340page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6341
6342@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6343When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6344of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6345addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6346@code{bset} instructions.
6347
6348@end table
6349
6350@subsection Trampoline Generation
6351
6352@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6353@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6354For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6355call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6356will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6357trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6358case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6359point to the function trampoline.
6360
6361@ifclear GENERIC
6362@lowersections
6363@end ifclear
6364@end ifset
6365
36f63dca 6366@node ARM
3674e28a 6367@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6368
6369@cindex ARM interworking support
6370@kindex --support-old-code
6371For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6372between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6373been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6374line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6375libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6376option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6377given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6378which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6379the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6380non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6381
6382@cindex thumb entry point
6383@cindex entry point, thumb
6384@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6385The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6386@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6387But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6388branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6389executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6390
ce11ba6c
KT
6391@cindex PE import table prefixing
6392@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6393The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6394the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6395element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6396import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6397
e489d0ae
PB
6398@cindex BE8
6399@kindex --be8
6400The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6401executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6402The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6403
3674e28a
PB
6404@cindex TARGET1
6405@kindex --target1-rel
6406@kindex --target1-abs
6407The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6408@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6409or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6410and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6411
6412@cindex TARGET2
6413@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6414The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6415@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6416meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6417@table @samp
6418@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6419@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6420@item abs
6421@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6422@item got-rel
6423@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6424@end table
6425
319850b4
JB
6426@cindex FIX_V4BX
6427@kindex --fix-v4bx
6428The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6429specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6430interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6431also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6432
6433In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6434linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6435@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6436
6437In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6438relocations are ignored.
6439
845b51d6
PB
6440@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6441@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6442Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6443relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6444
6445@smallexample
6446TST rM, #1
6447MOVEQ PC, rM
6448BX Rn
6449@end smallexample
6450
6451This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6452and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6453condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6454
33bfe774
JB
6455@cindex USE_BLX
6456@kindex --use-blx
6457The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6458BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6459situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6460code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6461each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6462
6463This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6464specify it if you are using that target.
6465
c6dd86c6
JB
6466@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6467@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6468The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6469bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6470instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6471to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6472the support code can read the intended values.
6473
6474The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6475intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6476and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6477intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6478full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6479you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6480
6481If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6482enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6483@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6484mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6485vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6486@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6487
6488If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6489potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6490such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6491first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6492instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6493the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6494are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6495
2de70689
MGD
6496@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6497@kindex --fix-arm1176
6498@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6499The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6500in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6501are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6502unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6503
9d5777a3 6504Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6505Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6506http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6507
bf21ed78
MS
6508@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6509@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6510The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6511warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6512enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6513linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6514using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6515not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6516
6517@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6518@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6519The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6520warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6521@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6522linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6523using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6524
726150b7
NC
6525@cindex PIC_VENEER
6526@kindex --pic-veneer
6527The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6528ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6529is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6530@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6531
6532@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6533@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6534The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6535code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6536perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6537placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6538controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6539The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6540duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6541group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6542code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6543where they should be placed.
6544
6545The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6546@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6547placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6548branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6549placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6550value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6551exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6552A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6553linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6554from the input sections.
6555
6556The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6557@samp{N = +1}.
6558
1a51c1a4
NC
6559Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6560only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6561otherwise.
6562
1db37fe6
YG
6563@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6564@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6565@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6566The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6567
6568The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6569
6570@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6571@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6572@cindex Merging exidx entries
6573The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6574
6575@kindex --long-plt
6576@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6577The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6578which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6579entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6580
36f63dca
NC
6581@ifclear GENERIC
6582@lowersections
6583@end ifclear
6584@end ifset
6585
6586@ifset HPPA
6587@ifclear GENERIC
6588@raisesections
6589@end ifclear
6590
6591@node HPPA ELF32
6592@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6593@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6594@kindex --multi-subspace
6595When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6596import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6597The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6598stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6599multiple sub-spaces.
6600
6601@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6602@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6603Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6604stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6605@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6606sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6607a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6608the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6609conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6610prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6611A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6612branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6613@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6614@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6615detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6616positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6617
6618Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6619single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6620create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6621large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6622
6623@ifclear GENERIC
6624@lowersections
6625@end ifclear
6626@end ifset
6627
7fb9f789
NC
6628@ifset M68K
6629@ifclear GENERIC
6630@raisesections
6631@end ifclear
6632
6633@node M68K
6634@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6635
6636@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6637@kindex --got=@var{type}
6638The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6639The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6640@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6641the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6642@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6643entries only at non-negative offsets.
6644@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6645entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6646support such GOTs.
6647@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6648output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6649file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6650files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6651
6652@ifclear GENERIC
6653@lowersections
6654@end ifclear
6655@end ifset
6656
833794fc
MR
6657@ifset MIPS
6658@ifclear GENERIC
6659@raisesections
6660@end ifclear
6661
6662@node MIPS
6663@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6664
6665@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6666@kindex --insn32
6667@kindex --no-insn32
6668The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6669microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6670in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6671used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6672or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6673including 16-bit ones where possible.
6674
6675@ifclear GENERIC
6676@lowersections
6677@end ifclear
6678@end ifset
6679
36f63dca
NC
6680@ifset MMIX
6681@ifclear GENERIC
6682@raisesections
6683@end ifclear
6684
6685@node MMIX
6686@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6687For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6688@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6689understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6690can translate between the two formats.
6691
6692There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6693Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6694registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6695equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6696@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6697global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6698this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6699symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6700
7a2de473
HPN
6701Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6702@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6703The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6704of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6705
6706Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6707are left out from an mmo file.
6708
6709@ifclear GENERIC
6710@lowersections
6711@end ifclear
6712@end ifset
6713
6714@ifset MSP430
6715@ifclear GENERIC
6716@raisesections
6717@end ifclear
6718
6719@node MSP430
6720@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6721For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6722will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6723just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6724
6725@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6726The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6727
6728@table @code
6729@item @samp{.vectors}
6730Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6731
6732@item @samp{.bootloader}
6733Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6734in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6735
6736@item @samp{.infomem}
6737Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6738this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6739
c0065db7 6740@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6741This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6742in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6743
6744@item @samp{.noinit}
6745Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6746
c0065db7 6747The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6748@end table
6749
6750@ifclear GENERIC
6751@lowersections
6752@end ifclear
6753@end ifset
6754
35c08157
KLC
6755@ifset NDS32
6756@ifclear GENERIC
6757@raisesections
6758@end ifclear
6759
6760@node NDS32
6761@section @code{ld} and NDS32
6762@kindex relaxing on NDS32
6763For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6764relaxes objects according to these options.
6765
6766@table @code
6767@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6768Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6769
6770@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6771Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6772
6773@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6774Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6775
6776@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6777Export the EX9 table after linking.
6778
6779@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6780Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6781
6782@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6783Update the existing EX9 table.
6784
6785@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6786Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6787
6788@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6789Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6790
6791@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6792Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6793
6794@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6795Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6796@end table
6797
6798@ifclear GENERIC
6799@lowersections
6800@end ifclear
6801@end ifset
6802
78058a5e
SL
6803@ifset NIOSII
6804@ifclear GENERIC
6805@raisesections
6806@end ifclear
6807
6808@node Nios II
6809@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6810@cindex Nios II call relaxation
6811@kindex --relax on Nios II
6812
6813Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6814transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6815which may result in @command{ld} giving
6816@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6817The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6818trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6819outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6820trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6821be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6822larger than 256MB.
6823
6824The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6825is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6826@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6827locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6828source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6829register as a temporary.
6830
6831Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
6832relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
6833option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
6834
6835@ifclear GENERIC
6836@lowersections
6837@end ifclear
6838@end ifset
6839
2a60a7a8
AM
6840@ifset POWERPC
6841@ifclear GENERIC
6842@raisesections
6843@end ifclear
6844
6845@node PowerPC ELF32
6846@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6847@cindex PowerPC long branches
6848@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6849Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6850displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6851@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6852@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6853the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6854section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6855section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6856@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6857both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6858considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6859
6860@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6861@table @option
6862@cindex PowerPC PLT
6863@kindex --bss-plt
6864@item --bss-plt
6865Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6866generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6867the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6868writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6869@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6870PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6871compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6872BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6873
016687f8
AM
6874@kindex --secure-plt
6875@item --secure-plt
6876@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6877@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6878when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6879layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6880style BSS PLT.
6881
2a60a7a8
AM
6882@cindex PowerPC GOT
6883@kindex --sdata-got
6884@item --sdata-got
6885The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6886sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6887@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6888section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6889@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6890@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6891@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6892@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6893PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6894pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6895GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6896really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6897
6898@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6899@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6900@item --emit-stub-syms
6901This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6902symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6903
6904@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6905@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6906@item --no-tls-optimize
6907PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6908sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6909disable the optimization.
6910@end table
6911
6912@ifclear GENERIC
6913@lowersections
6914@end ifclear
6915@end ifset
6916
6917@ifset POWERPC64
6918@ifclear GENERIC
6919@raisesections
6920@end ifclear
6921
6922@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6923@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6924
6925@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6926@table @option
6927@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6928@kindex --stub-group-size
6929@item --stub-group-size
6930Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6931by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6932@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6933sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6934a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6935the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6936conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6937prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6938A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6939branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6940@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6941@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6942detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6943positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6944
6945Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6946single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6947create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6948large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6949
6950@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6951@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6952@item --emit-stub-syms
6953This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6954symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6955
6956@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6957@kindex --dotsyms
6958@kindex --no-dotsyms
6959@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6960These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6961in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6962function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6963code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6964properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6965to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6966@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6967dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6968feature.
6969
6970@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6971@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6972@item --no-tls-optimize
6973PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6974sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6975disable the optimization.
6976
6977@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6978@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6979@item --no-opd-optimize
6980PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6981corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6982the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6983Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6984
6985@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6986@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6987@item --non-overlapping-opd
6988Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6989@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6990the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6991entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6992
6993@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6994@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6995@item --no-toc-optimize
6996PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6997entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6998reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6999marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7000marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7001relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7002unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7003reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7004discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7005reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7006code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7007optimization.
7008
7009@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7010@kindex --no-multi-toc
7011@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7012If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7013@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7014where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7015entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7016total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7017grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7018TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7019calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7020help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
702164K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7022Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7023
7024@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7025@kindex --no-toc-sort
7026@item --no-toc-sort
7027By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7028happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7029placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7030with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7031referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7032@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7033results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7034off this feature.
7035
7036@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7037@kindex --plt-align
7038@kindex --no-plt-align
7039@item --plt-align
7040@itemx --no-plt-align
7041Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7042aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7043boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. By default PLT call stubs
7044are packed tightly.
7045
7046@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7047@kindex --plt-static-chain
7048@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7049@item --plt-static-chain
7050@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7051Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7052chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7053chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7054
7055@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7056@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7057@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7058@item --plt-thread-safe
7059@itemx --no-thread-safe
7060With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7061lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7062another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7063order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7064memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7065barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7066looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7067seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7068default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7069@end table
7070
7071@ifclear GENERIC
7072@lowersections
7073@end ifclear
7074@end ifset
7075
49fa1e15
AM
7076@ifset SPU
7077@ifclear GENERIC
7078@raisesections
7079@end ifclear
7080
7081@node SPU ELF
7082@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7083
7084@cindex SPU ELF options
7085@table @option
7086
7087@cindex SPU plugins
7088@kindex --plugin
7089@item --plugin
7090This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7091
7092@cindex SPU overlays
7093@kindex --no-overlays
7094@item --no-overlays
7095Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7096regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7097@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7098turns off all this special overlay handling.
7099
7100@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7101@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7102@item --emit-stub-syms
7103This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7104symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7105
7106@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7107@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7108@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7109This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7110function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7111on calls to non-overlay regions.
7112
7113@cindex SPU local store size
7114@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7115@item --local-store=lo:hi
7116@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7117the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7118range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7119
c0065db7 7120@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7121@kindex --stack-analysis
7122@item --stack-analysis
7123SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7124unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7125under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7126@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7127@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7128determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7129for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7130for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7131for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7132find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7133and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7134under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7135dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7136is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7137and calls will be given.
7138
c0065db7 7139@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7140@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7141@item --emit-stack-syms
7142This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7143in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7144These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7145functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7146functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7147such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7148The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7149@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7150@end table
7151
7152@ifclear GENERIC
7153@lowersections
7154@end ifclear
7155@end ifset
7156
36f63dca
NC
7157@ifset TICOFF
7158@ifclear GENERIC
7159@raisesections
7160@end ifclear
7161
7162@node TI COFF
7163@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7164@cindex TI COFF versions
7165@kindex --format=@var{version}
7166The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7167TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7168also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7169format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7170header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7171
7172@ifclear GENERIC
7173@lowersections
7174@end ifclear
7175@end ifset
7176
2ca22b03
NC
7177@ifset WIN32
7178@ifclear GENERIC
7179@raisesections
7180@end ifclear
7181
7182@node WIN32
7183@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7184
c0065db7 7185This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7186See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7187command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7188
7189@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7190@cindex import libraries
7191@item import libraries
69da35b5 7192The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7193libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7194regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7195archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7196support for creating such libraries provided with the
7197@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7198
c0065db7
RM
7199@item exporting DLL symbols
7200@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7201The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7202
7203@table @emph
7204@item using auto-export functionality
7205@cindex using auto-export functionality
7206By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7207which is controlled by the following command line options:
7208
0a5d968e
NC
7209@itemize
7210@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7211@item --exclude-symbols
7212@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7213@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7214@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7215@end itemize
7216
09e2aba4
DK
7217When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7218(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7219symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7220often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7221private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7222options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7223exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7224final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7225
7226If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7227command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7228if either of the following are true:
7229
7230@itemize
7231@item A DEF file is used.
7232@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7233@end itemize
dc8465bf 7234
c0065db7
RM
7235@item using a DEF file
7236@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7237Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7238an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7239exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7240name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7241command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7242
7243@example
7244gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7245@end example
7246
0a5d968e
NC
7247Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7248@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7249
dc8465bf
NC
7250Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7251
7252@example
4b5bd4e7 7253LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7254
7255EXPORTS
7256foo
7257bar
7258_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7259another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7260var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7261doo = foo == foo2
7262eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7263@end example
dc8465bf 7264
7fcab871 7265This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7266symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7267alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7268by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7269@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7270@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7271export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7272in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7273symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7274
6b31ad16
DS
7275The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7276name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7277the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7278
b45619c0
NC
7279When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7280library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7281@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7282executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7283
7284With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7285specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7286non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7287
7288If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7289or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7290filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7291
4b5bd4e7
DS
7292The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7293
7294@example
7295EXPORTS
7296 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7297 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7298 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7299@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7300
7301Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7302@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7303@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7304@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7305Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7306@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7307string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7308
7309The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7310
7311@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7312will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7313by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7314linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7315library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7316
7317@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7318The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7319the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7320@code{*_imp__foo}).
7321
7322@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7323well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7324read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7325variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7326the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7327extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7328application will behave unexpectedly.
7329
7330@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7331it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7332symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7333API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7334the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7335
4b5bd4e7
DS
7336See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7337other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7338
7339@cindex creating a DEF file
7340While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7341with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7342
7343@item Using decorations
7344@cindex Using decorations
7345Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7346itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7347declared as:
7348
7349@example
7350__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7351__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7352@end example
7353
7354All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7355any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7356this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7357the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7358
7359Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7360decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7361instead:
7362
7363@example
7364__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7365__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7366@end example
7367
c0065db7
RM
7368This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7369when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7370variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7371code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7372of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7373omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7374@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7375information.
c0065db7 7376@end table
dc8465bf 7377
2ca22b03
NC
7378@cindex automatic data imports
7379@item automatic data imports
7380The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7381by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7382compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7383issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7384code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7385c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7386initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7387decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7388platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7389command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7390The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7391suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7392trigger the feature's use.
7393
c0065db7 7394auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7395additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7396
c0065db7 7397"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7398documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7399
c0065db7
RM
7400The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7401occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7402One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7403below.
7404
7405@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7406For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7407object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7408offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7409field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7410in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7411without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7412The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7413references.
7414
c0065db7
RM
7415The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7416be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7417themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7418runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7419compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7420support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7421run without error on an older system.
7422
c0065db7
RM
7423@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7424enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7425
7426@cindex direct linking to a dll
7427@item direct linking to a dll
7428The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7429including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7430libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7431traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7432libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7433function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7434though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7435storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7436tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7437large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7438
c0065db7 7439Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7440@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7441of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7442perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7443select the dll instead of an import library.
7444
2ca22b03 7445
69da35b5
NC
7446For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7447to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7448
7449@example
45e948fe
NC
7450libxxx.dll.a
7451xxx.dll.a
7452libxxx.a
7453xxx.lib
69da35b5 7454cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7455libxxx.dll
7456xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7457@end example
7458
69da35b5
NC
7459before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7460
c0065db7
RM
7461(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7462where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7463@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7464file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7465@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7466
c0065db7
RM
7467Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7468@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7469was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7470various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7471could coexist on the same machine.
7472
2ca22b03
NC
7473The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7474applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7475libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7476
7477@example
7478bin/
7479 cygxxx.dll
7480lib/
7481 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7482 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7483@end example
7484
c0065db7
RM
7485Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7486done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7487
74881. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7489@example
7490gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7491@end example
2ca22b03 7492
69da35b5
NC
7493However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7494(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7495@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7496not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7497
2ca22b03
NC
74982. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7499directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7500should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7501making the app/dll.
7502
7503@example
7504ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7505@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7506
7507Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7508
7509@example
7510gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7511@end example
69da35b5
NC
7512
7513This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7514perfectly legal
7515
7516@example
7517bin/
7518 cygxxx-5.dll
7519lib/
c0065db7 7520 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7521@end example
7522
dc8465bf 7523Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7524even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7525@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7526
7527Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7528wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7529
75301. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7531work with auto-imported data.
7532
dc8465bf
NC
75332. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7534import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7535symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7536for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7537possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7538
45e948fe
NC
75393. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7540critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7541in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7542stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7543
69da35b5 7544So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7545true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7546a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7547binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7548massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7549requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7550will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7551
c0065db7 7552@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7553@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7554@item adding additional names
7555Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7556A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7557exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7558when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7559import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7560
c0065db7 7561@example
dc8465bf
NC
7562LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7563
7564EXPORTS
c0065db7 7565foo
dc8465bf 7566_foo = foo
c0065db7 7567@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7568
7569The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7570
7571Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7572source code using the "weak" attribute:
7573
c0065db7
RM
7574@example
7575void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7576void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7577@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7578
7579See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7580symbols.
7581
7582@item renaming symbols
7583Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7584kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7585@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7586DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7587created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7588
c0065db7 7589@example
dc8465bf
NC
7590LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7591
7592EXPORTS
7593_foo = foo
c0065db7 7594@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7595
7596The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7597@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7598@end table
dc8465bf 7599
0a5d968e 7600Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7601unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7602If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7603@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7604that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7605@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7606renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7607to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7608the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7609In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7610which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7611
7612@cindex weak externals
7613@item weak externals
7614The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7615weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7616defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7617are three variants of weak externals:
7618@itemize
7619@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7620called lazy externals.
7621@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7622This form is not presently implemented.
7623@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7624implemented.
7625@end itemize
7626As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7627are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7628uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7629
7630@cindex aligned common symbols
7631@item aligned common symbols
7632As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7633desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7634the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7635carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7636by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7637tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7638but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7639warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 7640
2ca22b03
NC
7641@end table
7642
7643@ifclear GENERIC
7644@lowersections
7645@end ifclear
7646@end ifset
7647
e0001a05
NC
7648@ifset XTENSA
7649@ifclear GENERIC
7650@raisesections
7651@end ifclear
7652
7653@node Xtensa
7654@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7655
7656@cindex Xtensa processors
7657The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7658@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7659specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7660keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7661example, with the command:
7662
7663@smallexample
7664SECTIONS
7665@{
7666 .text : @{
7667 *(.literal .text)
7668 @}
7669@}
7670@end smallexample
7671
7672@noindent
7673@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7674and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7675literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7676interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7677group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7678files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7679and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7680
43cd72b9 7681@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7682@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7683Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7684provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7685is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7686literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7687will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7688location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7689the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7690unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7691@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7692range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7693
7694For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7695to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7696instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7697instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7698instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7699@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7700hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7701By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7702switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7703density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7704instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7705performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7706linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7707a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7708
7709The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7710control the linker:
7711
7712@cindex Xtensa options
7713@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7714@item --size-opt
7715When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7716more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7717no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7718alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7719preserve the correctness of the code.
7720@end table
e0001a05
NC
7721
7722@ifclear GENERIC
7723@lowersections
7724@end ifclear
7725@end ifset
7726
252b5132
RH
7727@ifclear SingleFormat
7728@node BFD
7729@chapter BFD
7730
7731@cindex back end
7732@cindex object file management
7733@cindex object formats available
7734@kindex objdump -i
7735The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7736These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7737object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7738format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7739it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7740associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7741object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7742(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7743list all the formats available for your configuration.
7744
7745@cindex BFD requirements
7746@cindex requirements for BFD
7747As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7748several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7749BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7750formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7751been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7752BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7753may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7754
7755One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7756mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7757useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7758conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7759
7760@menu
7761* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7762@end menu
7763
7764@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7765@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7766@cindex opening object files
7767@include bfdsumm.texi
7768@end ifclear
7769
7770@node Reporting Bugs
7771@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7772@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7773@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7774
ff5dcc92 7775Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7776
7777Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7778it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7779to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7780work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7781@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7782
7783In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7784information that enables us to fix the bug.
7785
7786@menu
7787* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7788* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7789@end menu
7790
7791@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7792@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7793@cindex bug criteria
7794
7795If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7796
7797@itemize @bullet
7798@cindex fatal signal
7799@cindex linker crash
7800@cindex crash of linker
7801@item
7802If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7803@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7804
7805@cindex error on valid input
7806@item
ff5dcc92 7807If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7808
7809@cindex invalid input
7810@item
ff5dcc92 7811If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7812may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7813object files are correct.
7814
7815@item
7816If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7817improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7818@end itemize
7819
7820@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7821@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7822@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7823@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7824
7825A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7826products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7827recommend you contact that organization first.
7828
7829You can find contact information for many support companies and
7830individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7831distribution.
7832
ad22bfe8 7833@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7834Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7835@value{BUGURL}.
7836@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7837
7838The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7839@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7840fact or leave it out, state it!
7841
7842Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7843problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7844assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7845matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7846the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7847location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7848were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7849into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7850specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7851and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7852
7853Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7854the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7855on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7856
7857Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7858bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7859respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7860You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7861
7862To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7863
7864@itemize @bullet
7865@item
ff5dcc92 7866The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7867the @samp{--version} argument.
7868
7869Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7870the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7871
7872@item
ff5dcc92 7873Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7874patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7875
7876@item
7877The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7878version number.
7879
7880@item
ff5dcc92 7881What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7882``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7883
7884@item
7885The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7886observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7887list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7888sufficient.
7889
7890If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7891and then we might not encounter the bug.
7892
7893@item
7894A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7895bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7896provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7897bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7898state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7899requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7900we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7901attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7902
7903If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7904@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7905object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7906@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7907how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7908
7909@item
7910A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7911incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7912
ff5dcc92 7913Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7914will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7915not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7916a chance to make a mistake.
7917
7918Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7919say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7920copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7921C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7922and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7923fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7924you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7925any conclusion from our observations.
7926
7927@item
ff5dcc92 7928If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7929diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7930@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7931If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7932context, not by line number.
7933
7934The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7935sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7936@end itemize
7937
7938Here are some things that are not necessary:
7939
7940@itemize @bullet
7941@item
7942A description of the envelope of the bug.
7943
7944Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7945which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7946changes will not affect it.
7947
7948This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7949will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7950with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7951We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7952
7953Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7954of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7955output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7956less time, and so on.
7957
7958However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7959report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7960
7961@item
7962A patch for the bug.
7963
7964A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7965the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7966a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7967to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7968
ff5dcc92 7969Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7970construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7971through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7972able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7973fixed.
7974
7975And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7976patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7977help us to understand.
7978
7979@item
7980A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7981
7982Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7983things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7984@end itemize
7985
7986@node MRI
7987@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7988@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7989To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7990linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7991alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7992described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7993simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7994@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7995linker commands; these commands are described here.
7996
7997In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7998file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7999features to make use of them.
8000
8001You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8002@samp{-c} command-line option.
8003
8004Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8005command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8006blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8007MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8008issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8009
8010Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8011
8012You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8013lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8014The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8015
8016@table @code
8017@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8018@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8019@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8020Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8021the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8022@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8023your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8024script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8025commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8026input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8027@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8028
8029@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8030@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8031Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8032in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8033
8034@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8035
8036@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8037@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8038Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8039@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8040
8041@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8042@item BASE @var{expression}
8043Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8044absolute addresses) in the output file.
8045
8046@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8047@item CHIP @var{expression}
8048@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8049This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8050
8051@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8052@item END
8053This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8054
8055@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8056@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8057Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8058language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8059
8060@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8061@item
252b5132
RH
8062S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8063
8064@item
8065IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8066
8067@item
8068COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8069@samp{COFF}
8070@end enumerate
8071
8072@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8073@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8074Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8075@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8076
8077The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8078same line, with no change in its effect.
8079
8080@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8081@item LOAD @var{filename}
8082@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8083Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8084same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8085command line.
8086
8087@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8088@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8089@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8090MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8091option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8092
8093@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8094@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8095@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8096Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8097order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8098script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8099sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8100file, in the order specified.
8101
8102@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8103@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8104@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8105@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8106Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8107@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8108
8109@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8110@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8111@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8112@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8113You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8114specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8115If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8116@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8117@end table
8118
793c5807
NC
8119@node GNU Free Documentation License
8120@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8121@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8122
370b66a1
CD
8123@node LD Index
8124@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8125
8126@printindex cp
8127
8128@tex
7ca01ed9 8129% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8130% meantime:
8131\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8132\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8133\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8134\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8135\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8136\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8137\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8138\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8139\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8140% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8141@end tex
8142
252b5132 8143@bye
This page took 2.501751 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.